Programmer's

Reference Manual

IPL (Intermec Printer

Language)
Intermec Technologies Corporation
Worldwide Headquarters
6001 36th Ave.W.
Everett, WA 98203
U.S.A.
www.intermec.com
The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and
service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose
without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation.
Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior noticed and do
not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation.
© 2006 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved.
The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser,
Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, INCA (under license), i-gistics, Intellitag, Intellitag
Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan,
Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks
or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation.
There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending.
Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.

ii IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Document Change Record
This page records changes to this document. The document was originally
released as version -001.
Revision Date Description of Change
003 10/2000 Revised throughout to include EasyCoder F4 printer
information.
004 04/2001 Revised to include 3400e series printer information.
005 12/2001 Revised to include 44X0 printer information.
006 03/2003 Revised to include:
• IPL v1.4 and 2.0 functionality.
• Command information for the EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and
PM4i printers.
007 10/2003 Revised to include minor changes. Added new Slash Zero,
Enable or Disable command.
008 06/2004 Revised to include:
• IPL v2.30 functionality.
• Command information for the EasyCoder PX4i and PX6i
printers.
009 11/2004 Revised to include PC41 printer information.
010 02/2005 Revised to include minor changes for IPL v2.50, which
includes support for the Planet bar code. Other minor changes
were made throughout the manual.
011 06/2005 Revised to include changes for IPL v2.60, which includes
support for RFID commands and new RFID tag formats.
Other minor changes were made throughout the manual.
012 12/2005 Revised to include changes for IPL v2.70.0, which includes
additional support for RFID commands.
013 06/2006 Revised to include PD41 printer information. Symbology
modifier information for the Bar Code, Select Type command
was moved to Appendix F.
Other minor changes were made throughout Chapter 7, “IPL
Command Reference.”

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual iii

iv IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual
 Contents

Contents
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Global Services and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Web Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Telephone Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Who Should Read This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

1 Introduction to IPL Commands ............................................. 1

What Is IPL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

What Are IPL Commands? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

What’s New for IPL v2.71.0? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Programming for Intermec Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Learning the Structure of IPL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Using Control Characters in IPL Command Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Sending IPL Commands to the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Downloading Commands From Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sending a String of Commands Through an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Working With RFID Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

How to Write Data to an RFID Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
How Data is Stored on an RFID Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Writing Hex or ASCII Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Writing Numerical Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

What to Read Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

What Types of Fonts Can I Download? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Using PrintSet to Download Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Installing International Character Sets Using GLOBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

What Types of Fonts Does GLOBE Support? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Do You Need to Purchase Additional RAM?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Licensing Your Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual v

Contents

Creating Bitmap Fonts From TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Selecting the Printer Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing Code Page Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Using IPL Commands to Download Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Downloading Bitmap Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Downloading Outline Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Using Third-Party Software Applications to Download Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

3 Designing Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Introduction to Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Tutorial for Designing and Creating a Label Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Defining Label Design Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Human-Readable Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Line and Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Editing Label Formats and Working With Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Editing Existing Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Deleting Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Positioning Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rotating Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Scaling Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Magnifying Fonts and Character Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Magnifying Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Designing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Label Format - Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Graphic for Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Format for Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Data for Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Label Format - RFID Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Format for RFID Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Data for RFID Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Troubleshooting Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

How the Printer Handles Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Syntax Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Parameter Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Image Overrun Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Invalid Numeric Character Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Insufficient Storage Memory Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

vi IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Contents

Interpreting Error Codes and Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

5 Advanced Printer Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Using the Printer Memory Efficiently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

How Is the Printer Storage Memory Used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Making the Most of Your Storage Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Increasing Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
What Is an Image Band? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
How the Image Bands Command Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Optimizing Print Speed and Image Band Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Reimaging Modified Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Optimizing Image Bands for Batch Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Using Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Commands Listed by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Commands Listed by Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Commands Listed by Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Program Mode Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Print Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Test and Service Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

7 IPL Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Which Commands Does Your Printer Support?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Abort Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Error Code, Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Label and Gap Length, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Status Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Status Enquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Print Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Advanced Mode, Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Alphanumeric Field Separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Batch Count, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Clear All Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Clear Data From Current Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Command Terminator 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Command Terminator 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Configuration Parameters, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual vii

Contents

Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Data Shift – International Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Direct Graphics Mode, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Emulation Mode, Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Field, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Field Decrement, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Field Increment, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
First Data Entry Field, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Font, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Form Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Format, Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Format, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Increment and Decrement, Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Memory Usage, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Next Data Entry Field, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Numeric Field Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Options Selected, Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Page, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Page, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Printhead Parameters, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Program Mode, Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Program Number, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Quantity Count, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
RFID Tag, Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Storage Area Usage, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Test and Service Mode, Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
User-Defined Characters, Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
User-Defined Tables, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Warm Boot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Amount of Storage, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Communication Port Configuration, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Control Panel Access Permission, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cutter, Enable or Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Dark Adjust, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Direct Graphics Emulation Mode, Enable or Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Intercharacter Delay, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Label Rest Point, Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Label Retract, Enable or Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Label Retract Distance, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Label Stock Type, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

viii IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Contents

Label Width, Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Maximum Label Length, Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Media Sensitivity, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Message Delay, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Number of Image Bands, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Online or Offline on Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Postamble, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Preamble, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Print Speed, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Printer Language, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Printhead Loading Mode, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Printhead Pressure, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Printhead Test Parameters, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
RFID Parameters, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
RFID Tag Void Text, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Ribbon Save Zones, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Serial Port Configuration, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Slash Zero, Enable or Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Takeup Motor Torque, Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Top of Form, Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Program Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Bar Code, Select Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Box Field, Create or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Command Tables, Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Current Edit Session, Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Data Source for Format in a Page, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Field, Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Field Data, Define Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Field Direction, Define. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Field Origin, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Font Character Width, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Font Type, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Format, Create or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Format Direction in a Page, Define. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Format, Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Format Offset Within a Page, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Format Page Position, Define Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Format Position From Page, Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Format Position in a Page, Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Graphic, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Graphic or UDC, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual ix

Contents

Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Interpretive Field, Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Length of Line or Box Field, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Line Field, Create or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Outline Font, Clear or Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Outline Font, Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Page, Create or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Page, Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Pitch Size, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Point Size, Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Program Mode, Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
RFID Tag Field Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
RFID Tag Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
RFID Tag Write Field, Create or Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
User-Defined Font Character, Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Test and Service Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Ambient Temperature, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Command Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Dark Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Factory Defaults, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Formats, Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Hardware Configuration Label, Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Pages, Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Pitch Label, Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Print Quality Label, Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Printhead Resistance Test, Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Software Configuration Label, Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Test and Service Mode, Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
User-Defined Fonts, Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

A Full ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Full ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Full ASCII Control Characters Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

x IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Contents

B Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

International Character Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Advanced Character Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8636/46 Character Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
IBM Translation Character Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Code Page 850 Character Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Extended Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

D User-Defined Interface Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Print Commands (t = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Escape Print Commands (t = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Shift Print Commands (t = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Status Responses and Auto-Transmit Commands (t = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Protocol Commands (t = 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Communications Protocol Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

E Using Direct Graphics Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

What Is Direct Graphics Mode?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

What Is Run-Length Encoding? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
How Do I Send a Direct Graphic to the Printer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Direct Graphics Mode, Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Change Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
End of Bitmap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
End of Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Raw Bitmap Data Follows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Repeat Last Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Transition Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Transition White. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Using Direct Graphics Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual xi

Contents

F Symbology Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Using Symbology Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Code 39 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Code 93 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Interleaved 2 of 5 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Code 2 of 5 Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Codabar Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Code 11 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Code 128 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
UPC/EAN Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
HIBC Code 39 Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Code 16K Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Code 49 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
POSTNET Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
PDF417 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Using m1 to Select the Number of Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Using m2 to Select an Error Correction Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Using m3 to Set the Truncate Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
MaxiCode Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
JIS-ITF Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Defining the Data Source for JIS-ITF Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
HIBC Code 128 Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Data Matrix Symbology Versions ECC-100 and ECC-200 Modifiers. . . . . . . . . 215
QR Code Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
MicroPDF417 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
RSS Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
EAN.UCC Composite Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Combinations of Linear and 2D Composite Components and Capacity 221
Planet Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Aztec Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

I Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

xii IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Before You Begin

Before You Begin

This section provides you with safety information, technical support
information, and sources for additional product information.

Safety Information
Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all cautions in this
document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. Your
equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety
cautions.
This section explains how to identify and understand the cautions and
notes that are in this document.
A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or
statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage
or destruction, or corruption or loss of data.

Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain

special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of
circumstances.

Global Services and Support

Warranty Information
To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec
web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support > Warranty.
Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is
presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent
complete, tested programs. The code is provided “as is with all faults.” All
warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Web Support
Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current
manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals,
contact your local Intermec representative or distributor.
Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at
intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request
technical support for your Intermec product.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual xiii

Before You Begin

Telephone Support
These services are available from Intermec.

In the USA and Canada

call 1-800-755-5505 and
Services Description choose this option
Order Intermec • Place an order. 1 and then choose 2
products • Ask about an existing order.
Order Intermec media Order printer labels and ribbons. 1 and then choose 1
Order spare parts Order spare parts. 1 or 2 and then choose 4
Technical Support Talk to technical support about 2 and then choose 2
your Intermec product.
Service • Get a return authorization 2 and then choose 1
number for authorized service
center repair.
• Request an on-site repair
technician.
Service contracts • Ask about an existing contract. 1 or 2 and then choose 3
• Renew a contract.
• Inquire about repair billing or
other service invoicing
questions.

Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative.
To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click
Contact.

Who Should Read This Manual

This document explains how to use the Intermec Printer Language (IPL) to
program Intermec printers and has a command reference chapter that
provides a complete list of the commands.
Before you use IPL, you should be familiar with your network, general
networking terms, such as IP address, and your bar code label printers.

Related Documents
The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents (as
PDF files) that you can download for free.
To download documents
1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.
2 Click Service & Support > Manuals.
3 In the Select a Product field, choose the product whose documentation
you want to download.
To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local
Intermec representative or distributor.

xiv IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 1 Introduction to IPL
Commands

This chapter describes Intermec’s approach to printing labels and

introduces the Intermec Printer Language (IPL) command set. The
chapter also explains how to switch between Print and Program modes,
how to send IPL files to a printer, and how to use ASCII control
characters in IPL commands. The chapter concludes with a roadmap to
the rest of the manual.
In this manual, “printer” can refer to the 3240, 3400, 3440, 3600, 4100,
4400, 4420, 4440, 4630, 4830, 7421, PC41, EasyCoder F4, EasyCoder
PD41, EasyCoder PF2i, EasyCoder PF4i, EasyCoder PM4i, EasyCoder
PX4i, or EasyCoder PX6i bar code label printer.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 1

Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

What Is IPL?
Intermec Printer Language (IPL) is one of the programming languages that
has been developed for use with Intermec printers. IPL is an easy-to-use
programming language that lets you:
• design formats (templates) for bar code labels (media).
• download bar code label formats to the printer.
• modify a bar code label that is stored in the printer.
• download data to fill in a bar code label and RFID tag information and
print the label.
• enable or disable printer features and options.
• query the printer for hardware diagnostic data and status of print jobs.
• abort print jobs and reset the printer.

What Are IPL Commands?

There are five types of IPL commands (Print, Program, Test and Service,
Configuration, and Immediate) and these types are related to the printer’s
three operating modes (Print, Program, and Test and Service). That is, in
order to execute an IPL command, the printer must be in the operating
mode that corresponds to the IPL command’s type.

IPL Command Types and Descriptions

IPL Command Printer Operating
Type Mode Uses for This Type of IPL Command
Print Print mode Download data to the printer and print bar code
labels.
(RFID) Pass data to formats and print labels.
Read RFID tag information.
Program Program mode Design label formats.
(RFID) Handle interaction with the chip in the
RFID tag.
Test and Service Test and Service Query the printer for hardware diagnostic
mode information.
Configuration Print mode Enable or disable printer features and options.
(RFID) Handles how the RFID tag interacts
with the printer.
Immediate Any operating mode Query the printer on the status of print jobs,
abort print jobs, and reset the printer.

Note: The printer executes Immediate commands as soon as it receives

them, even if there are other IPL commands waiting to be executed.

2 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

The printer does not execute a command that does not match the current
operating mode. For example, if you send a Program command while the
printer is in Print mode, the printer ignores the Program command. See
your printer user’s manual for help changing the mode of your printer, or
see “Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode” on page 7.

What’s New for IPL v2.71.0?

With this revision of the programmer’s reference manual, the following
changes were added to support IPL v2.71.0:
• Symbology modifiers for the Aztec bar code. Use these modifiers with
the Bar Code Type, Select command. For more information, see “Aztec
Modifiers” on page 223.
• Command reference information was revised to indicate commands
supported by the EasyCoder PD41 printer.

Note: For the PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, and PX6i printers, this release of
IPL firmware is version 2.71.0. The same release of the firmware for the
PD41 printer is version 10.0.0. This manual supports both versions. For
more information on Intermec printer firmware, contact your Intermec
sales representative.

Programming for Intermec Printers

When you program in IPL, you must understand the approach that
Intermec uses to print bar code labels. It is a two-step process:
1 Design the format (or template) for the bar code label, and then send
the format to the printer, where it is stored in memory.
2 Send another command to the printer that specifies the data for the
fields of the format and prints the label.

Note: It is not always necessary to send the format and the data to the
printer separately. You can send fixed data formats or even variable data
formats that include the data in the same file.
If you skip Step 1 and do not specify a format, the printer assumes you
want to use the default format, which is stored permanently in the printer.
The printer will print the label using that format. The default format is
called format 0.
You can store multiple formats on your printer. Many Intermec printers can
store up to 19 formats, but some printers (such as the 3240 and 3440) can
store up to 99. To learn how many formats your printer can store, see
“Format, Create or Edit” on page 139.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 3

Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

Learning the Structure of IPL Commands

This section describes general principles to follow when creating or
downloading IPL commands.

Note: The syntax of each IPL command is described in detail in Chapter 7,

“IPL Command Reference.”

• IPL commands are case sensitive. Type them as they appear in this
manual. For example, if the command is an uppercase “A,” do not enter
it as a lowercase “a.”
• Each command string that you download to a printer must begin with
the start of text character <STX> and end with the end of text character
<ETX>.

Note: When the printer is in XON/XOFF mode, you can send data and
print multiple labels without using the <ETX> character.

• The <STX> and <ETX> commands mark the beginning and end of a
message. The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. All commands
in Program mode or Test and Service mode must end with this
terminator except the last command in a string. Commands in Print
mode do not require the semicolon command terminator.
For example, a simple IPL command string looks like this:
<STX>E2;F2<ETX>

Using Control Characters in IPL Command Strings

Formats that you design with IPL commands require you to enter ASCII
control characters in your command strings. To create ASCII control
characters, either:
• enter a control code
or
• type the printable command characters.
Many word processing programs have the ability to represent ASCII control
characters such as <ETX> by entering a control code. For example, to enter
the hexadecimal equivalent of the ASCII character <ETX> on your
computer, you would type the control code 03. For help finding the
hexadecimal equivalent of a control character, consult the full ASCII table
in Appendix A.
If it is difficult for you to edit or transmit IPL command files that contain
ASCII control characters, you can use printable control characters instead.

4 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

A printable control character (or “readable character”) is a text string,

enclosed in angle brackets, that represents an ASCII control character. For
example, instead of entering a control code for the ASCII start of text
character, you can type these five readable characters:
<STX>
To determine the readable character for each ASCII control character, see
the full ASCII table in Appendix A. Simply enclose the text string in the
ASCII column in angle brackets to create the readable character.
The printer automatically detects whether you are using ASCII control
characters or readable characters by the start of text (<STX>) character,
which marks the beginning of an IPL command message. All characters in a
message must be in the same form (ASCII control character or readable
characters) as the start of text character. For example, if you begin a message
with the readable characters <STX>, the printer executes only the readable
characters in the message and throws away any ASCII control characters in
the message.
Using readable characters may consume more space and time, but it has the
distinct advantage of displaying everything on the screen in readable
characters.
Example of Using Control Codes
^B^Og1,567^C
where:
^B is the control code representation of hex 02 (the <STX> character).
^O is the control code representation of hex 0F (the <SI> character).
^C is the control code representation of hex 03 (the <ETX> character).
Example of Using Printable Control Characters
<STX><SI>g1,567<ETX>

Sending IPL Commands to the Printer

Before you can send IPL commands to the printer, you need to:
• connect the printer to a PC.
• create an ASCII text file of IPL commands.
To connect the printer to a PC
1 Connect the printer to the serial port on your PC using the correct
cable. For help selecting a cable, see your user’s manual.
2 Configure the PC for a serial connection to the printer by typing this
command at the DOS prompt and pressing Enter. This example
assumes that your serial connection is COM1.
MODE COM1 96,E,7,1,N
These serial connection characteristics are the default for the printer.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 5

Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

3 Make sure the printer is configured for the hardware flow control
(XON/XOFF) communications protocol. This protocol is the default.
For help, see your printer user’s manual.

Note: If you receive the “write fault error” error message, it indicates that
either you are sending the data to the wrong COM port or your cable does
not support hardware flow control. Try sending the data via Windows using
the information below.

To create an ASCII text file of IPL commands

1 Create a set of IPL commands. For help, see Chapter 2, “Downloading
Fonts to the Printer,” or Chapter 3, “Designing Bar Code Labels.”
2 Type the commands into the text file using any text editor or word
processor and save the file as an ASCII text file. Your ASCII text file can
contain an entire label format or just a single configuration command
that you use often.
For example, if you need to set the media sensitivity number often, you
may want to create a text file that contains the IPL command line:
<STX><SI>g1,567<ETX>.
You can send IPL commands to the printer in many ways. This section
describes two simple methods:
• Downloading commands from Windows
• Sending a string of commands through an application

Downloading Commands From Windows

After you create a text file of IPL commands, you can use Windows
HyperTerminal to send the file to the printer.
To download commands using HyperTerminal
1 Start the HyperTerminal application.
2 In the Connection Description dialog box, enter a name for your new
connection and click OK.
3 In the Phone number dialog box, select a serial port from the Connect
using list box and click OK.
4 In the COM Properties dialog box, set the port settings to your printer
communication settings. If you have not changed the printer default
settings, enter the following information and click OK:
Bits per second 9600
Data bits 7
Parity even
Stop bit 1
Flow control XON/XOFF
5 From the Main menu bar, select Transfer.

6 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

6 From the Transfer list box, select Send Text File.

7 In the Send Text File dialog box, locate your .txt file and click Open.
HyperTerminal sends the .txt file to your printer. Your command text file
will either change a configuration setting in the printer or print your label
format.

Sending a String of Commands Through an Application

You can send a string of IPL commands through a PC communications
application, a terminal emulation application, or a host terminal. See the
application’s documentation for instructions.
The disadvantage of sending a string of commands is that you must retype
the entire command string if you make an error while entering the
commands. It is easier to retype a command if you keep the command
strings short; therefore, you should design your label formats as
combinations of several short command strings rather than one very long
string.
To illustrate this idea, consider the next examples, which show two ways to
send a bar code label format to the printer. Example 1 uses several short
command strings to define the format. Example 2 combines all of the
commands into a single string.

Example 1
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E3;F3;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o81,120;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H3;o81,190;f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;p@;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>

Example 2
<STX><ESC>P;E3;F3;H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;H1;o81,120;
f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;H3;o81,190;
f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;p@;
R<ETX>
In Example 1, each line begins with the start of text character <STX> and
finishes with the end of text character <ETX>. If you make a mistake, you
need to retype only the line with the mistake. In Example 2, if you made a
mistake anywhere in the string, you must retype the entire format. Example
1 takes slightly longer to download, but is much easier to read and debug.

Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode

Print mode and Program mode are two different operating modes of the
printer. Before you download information to the printer, make sure that
you are in the correct mode:

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 7

Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

• Use Program mode to define formats, pages, fonts, and characters.

• Use Print mode to print labels, to download data to the printer, to
download configuration commands to the printer, or to upload
information from an RFID tag.
To enter Program mode on any printer
• Type this command:
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
Send this command every time that you download formats, even if you
think the printer is already in Program mode. If the printer is already in
Program mode, it ignores this command.
To enter Print mode on any printer
• Type this command:
<STX>R<ETX>
Send this command before each set of data or as your last format
command. If the printer is already in Print mode, it ignores this
command.

Note: The R command may be treated as data if the data to the printer does
not include a <CAN> or field pointer to clear the fields.

Working With RFID Tags

If a printer has an RFID module installed, the RFID mode is automatically
turned on. You need to configure the printer, declare a format that includes
commands to read and write to the tag, and print the format to a label. The
printer aligns the tag with the antenna, executes the RFID commands,
repositions the label, prints the image buffer to the label, and then positions
the next label for printing.

How to Write Data to an RFID Tag

To write data to an RFID tag you need to do two things: specify an area in
the tag’s memory and define the data that will be written to the tag. To
specify an area in the tag’s memory, you define an RFID tag write field.
This field specifies which segment is written to, the start position, length of
data (in bytes) and the format of the data.

How Data is Stored on an RFID Tag

Data written to the RFID tag is stored from the left starting with the byte
that is defined as the start of field byte and then going the length of the
defined field (in bytes).

8 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

Writing Hex or ASCII Formats

If the tag format is hex or ASCII and the field source data string is shorter
than the allocated number of bytes, the data string’s least significant bytes
(from the right) are padded with zeroes until they fill the length of the field.
If the field source data string is longer than the allocated number of bytes,
the error <EOT> is sent and nothing is written to the tag. If auto-transmit
level 3 is enabled, an <EOT> status response is returned to the host.

Writing Numerical Formats

If the tag format is numerical (NUM), the data is stored as a numerical
value. In this tag format, if the field source data string is shorter than the
allocated number of bytes, the data string’s most significant bytes (from the
left) are padded with zeroes until they fill the length of the field.

Note: The number of bytes needed to represent a numerical value is never

greater than the number of bytes needed to represent the number as a data
string.

What to Read Next

Now that you have been introduced to IPL commands, you can use this
manual to learn how to perform these tasks:

For Help With This Task See

To download any font to the printer Chapter 2
To design and code the formats for bar code labels Chapter 3
To diagnose and solve problems with IPL commands Chapter 4
To learn how to use printer memory efficiently, how to increase Chapter 5
throughput, and when to use Emulation mode
To find a specific IPL command Chapter 6
To look up the exact syntax and description of any IPL command Chapter 7
To refer to the Full ASCII table Appendix A
To see the character set tables Appendix B
To create your own fonts and graphics Appendix C
To refer to the user-defined interface tables Appendix D
To download direct graphics Appendix E
To configure symbology settings with the Bar Code, Select Type Appendix F
command modifiers

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 9

Chapter 1 — Introduction to IPL Commands

10 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 2 Downloading Fonts to the
Printer

This chapter explains how to download fonts to your Intermec printer.

You can use PrintSet, IPL commands, or third-party software applications.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 11

Chapter 2 — Downloading Fonts to the Printer

What Types of Fonts Can I Download?

You can download these types of fonts to most Intermec printers:
• Bitmap
• Outline (TrueType and Speedo)

Note: The 3400, 3400e, 3440, 4420, 4440, PD41, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, F4,
PX4i, and PX6i printers support the use of scalable TrueType fonts. Bitmap
fonts can be used on any Intermec printer, including those TrueType fonts
you have converted to bitmap using PrintSet. The PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, F4, PX4i, and PX6i do not support Speedo fonts.

In addition to the fonts permanently resident in your printer, you can

download fonts in the form of user-defined bitmap or outline (scalable)
fonts. Use this section to learn about the differences between bitmap and
outline fonts and how to choose the type of font you want to use.
Bitmap fonts commonly:
• print in one fixed size. (If you magnify the font, they print but are
ragged.)
• print quickly.
• are memory intensive when defined as large characters.
Outline fonts commonly:
• vary in size. You can print any size character up to 10.16 cm (4 in).
• print smooth characters.
• image slower than bitmap fonts.
Your printer supports two types of outline fonts: TrueType (support
available only on the 3400, 3400e, 3440, 4420, 4440, F4, PD41, PF2i,
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, and PX6i printers) and Speedo (not supported on the
F4, PD41, PF21, PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, or PX6i). TrueType fonts are the most
popular outline fonts, and several are available through Windows on your
PC. For help locating Speedo fonts, contact Intermec Technical Support.
See the next table to decide which fonts best suit your needs.

Font Selection Table

Concern Bitmap TrueType Speedo
image speed fastest medium fast
availability extensive extensive with Windows limited
storage space varies 50 - 80K per font usually; 20 - 30K per font
Japanese, Chinese and Korean
are considerably larger
size fixed variable variable

12 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 2 — Downloading Fonts to the Printer

You can download fonts to the printer and store them in the non-volatile
memory. Although the printer reserves 16 font ID numbers (3 to 6, and 8
to 19) for you to download fonts, memory constraints may limit the
number of fonts you can store.

Using PrintSet to Download Fonts

The easiest way to download fonts to the printer is with the PrintSet (v2.0
or later) printer configuration application. This application is on the CD
that shipped with your printer. You can also download the latest release of
PrintSet from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. You can use
PrintSet to select fonts and directly download them to your printer.
Bitmap fonts can be memory intensive, so you may decide not to download
the entire font to the printer. You can use PrintSet to define a subset of the
font (only the numbers, for example). Then you can download the subset,
saving storage space on the printer. The printer requires that bitmap fonts
be in one of these formats: one bit per byte or six bits per byte. PrintSet
automatically converts all bitmap fonts into the six bits per byte format.
PrintSet automatically converts scaleable outline fonts into nibblized data
that you can download to the printer. PrintSet can also convert fixed
outline fonts into bitmap fonts that you can download to the printer.
For more information on using PrintSet to download fonts, see the PrintSet
online documentation.

Installing International Character Sets Using GLOBE

Intermec’s goal is to help you easily localize your printer with the font set
you choose. To support this goal, Intermec printers now use GLOBE
(Global Languages On Bar Code Equipment) technology to download and
access single- and double-byte international character sets.

What Types of Fonts Does GLOBE Support?

Use GLOBE technology to install international character sets on your
printer. GLOBE technology is part of PrintSet, the Windows-based
configuration program that came on the CD with your printer. You can use
PrintSet to install these types of fonts:
• TrueType fonts
• Bitmap fonts generated from TrueType fonts using PrintSet

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 13

Chapter 2 — Downloading Fonts to the Printer

TrueType fonts are scaleable fonts that retain smooth contours at any size.
Since TrueType fonts may be very complex, they tend to image slower than
bitmap fonts. You cannot subset a TrueType font. You must download the
entire font to the printer.
Note: When using TrueType fonts, your printer must be configured to
operate in 8 bit mode. Intermec also recommends the following printer
configuration: highest supported bits per second (Baud rate), 8 data bits, no
parity, 1 stop bit, XON/XOFF flow control.

Your TrueType fonts must be compatible with Microsoft Windows. To

generate bitmap fonts from TrueType fonts for a particular language, you
must run PrintSet under that language version of Microsoft Windows. You
can run PrintSet Version 2.0 and later under Windows 95/98/NT 4.0/
2000/XP.
PrintSet 2.1 or later is required to install a Chinese, Japanese, or Korean
TrueType font. You must locate and install the necessary code page tables to
use with these language fonts. For help, see “Installing Code Page Tables”
on page 16.
Note: The EasyCoder F4 does not support bitmap or TrueType Chinese,
Japanese, or Korean fonts.

Do You Need to Purchase Additional RAM?

If you wish to install a TrueType font in your printer, you must have
enough memory available to contain the entire font file. The size of the
TrueType font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount of memory you must
have available in your printer. Bitmap fonts generated from TrueType files
will vary in size, depending on the point size and number of characters you
create. The larger the point size you choose, the larger the resulting file size.
Chinese, Japanese, and Korean languages contain thousands of characters.
If you wish to use these languages, you will need to purchase expanded flash
memory to store them in your printer. The amount of memory depends on
the size and number of fonts you wish to install.
Use the next table to determine the approximate size of some Asian
TrueType fonts. The approximate size is shown in dots per inch (dpi).
Approximate Sizes – Asian TrueType Fonts
Point Approximate Size Approximate Size
TrueType Font Size (400 dpi) (200 dpi)
Korean KSC-5601 12 pt 1.6MB 0.5MB
16 pt 2.7MB 0.8MB
24 pt 5.8MB 1.5MB
Traditional Chinese Big 5 12 pt 3.1MB 0.9MB
16 pt 5.25MB 1.6MB
Simplified Chinese GB 12 pt 3.5MB 1MB
16 pt 6.2MB 1.8MB

14 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 2 — Downloading Fonts to the Printer

Approximate Sizes – Asian TrueType Fonts

Point Approximate Size Approximate Size
TrueType Font Size (400 dpi) (200 dpi)
Japanese Shift-JIS 12 pt 3.9MB 1.1MB
16 pt 6.75MB 2MB

Some TrueType fonts require large amounts of dynamic RAM to operate. If

you receive an error code 37 when printing a label using TrueType fonts,
you may need to purchase expanded dynamic RAM.

Licensing Your Fonts

Although Intermec provides you with a tool to download international
characters sets, you must license the fonts that you purchase and install in
your printers. Contact your font vendor for licensing information.
These companies provide TrueType fonts compatible with Intermec
printers:
Galapagos Design Group Microsoft Corporation
256 Great Road One Microsoft Way
Suite 15 Redmond, WA 98052-6399
Littleton, MA 01360-1916 Tel: 425-882-8080
Tel: 978-952-6200 www.microsoft.com
Fax: 978-952-6260
e-mail: [email protected]

Dynalab Inc.
2055 Gateway Place
Suite 400
San Jose, CA 95110
Tel: 408-490-4224
Fax: 408-490-2233
www.dynalab.com

Note: Dynalab provides Chinese, Japanese, and Korean fonts. You can also
purchase fonts from their offices in Taiwan and Hong Kong. See the
Dynalab web page for the address of these offices.

Creating Bitmap Fonts From TrueType Fonts

To create bitmap fonts from TrueType fonts, you must run PrintSet under
the correct language version of Windows. For example, to create a
Traditional Chinese font, you must run PrintSet under Traditional Chinese
Microsoft Windows. In addition, you must install the font using Microsoft
Windows in order for PrintSet to correctly convert it to a bitmap font.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 15

Chapter 2 — Downloading Fonts to the Printer

The advantage of bitmap fonts is that they may require less RAM and the
printer can image them faster. When you download bitmap characters to
the printer, you must select the size of the characters. Make sure that you
select the size you want to use in your formats. If you magnify the character
size in the printer, the edges of the characters will be jagged.
Note: You can create Traditional or Simplified Chinese bitmap fonts up to
a size of 16 points at 400 dpi or 32 points at 200 dpi. The EasyCoder F4,
PD41, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, and PX6i do not support bitmapped
Chinese, Japanese, or Korean fonts.

For more information, see the PrintSet online documentation.

Selecting the Printer Language

When you install a TrueType font, you must select the correct printer
language. To choose the correct language, use the IPL command, Printer
Language, Select. If the language setting you have chosen does not work,
use the default language setting.

Installing Code Page Tables

If you install a Japanese, Chinese, or Korean TrueType font, you must also
install the code page tables. For a list of code pages, see the “Printer
Language, Select” command on page 118. You can download code pages
from Intermec’s web site at www.intermec.com, and then from the Service
& Support menu, choose Software Downloads. The files were compressed
using Microsoft WinZip application and have the file extension .ZIP. After
decompressing the file, install your code page as described in the procedure
below.
To install the code page tables in your printer
1 Copy the tables you wish to use to your PC:
SJIS.PCF - Japanese (Shift JIS)
BIG5.PCF - Traditional Chinese (Big 5)
GB.PCF - Simplified Chinese (GB 2312)
KSC.PCF - Korean (KSC5601)
2 Use Windows HyperTerminal to configure the PC to match the printer
settings. When using double-byte fonts, the recommended printer
configuration is COM 1, 19,200 bits per second, no parity, 8 data bits,
1 stop bit, and XON\XOFF flow control.
a Start HyperTerminal. (HyperTerminal is often located inside the
Accessories folder.) The Connection Description screen appears.
b In the Name field, enter a name for this connection (such as Printer)
and select an icon (optional). Click OK. The Connect To screen
appears.
c In the Connect Using list box, select the appropriate port. Click OK.
The port properties screen appears.

16 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 2 — Downloading Fonts to the Printer

d Enter data, matching the PC’s settings to the printer settings. Click
OK. The HyperTerminal main menu appears.
e From the Transfer menu, select Send File. The Send File screen
appears.
f In the Name field, locate your file, and then click Send.

Using IPL Commands to Download Fonts

Although the easiest way to download fonts is with PrintSet, you can also
use the IPL command set to create and download user-defined bitmap and
outline fonts to your Intermec printer.

Downloading Bitmap Fonts

To learn more about bitmap font formats, see “Creating User-Defined
Bitmap Fonts” on page 181.

Downloading Outline Fonts

If you need to download an outline font but you cannot use PrintSet, you
can:
• create a program to convert the outline font to a format you can
download to the printer.
• manually convert the outline font to a format you can download to the
printer.
When you convert an outline font to a format you can download to the
printer, you must change the font character data into nibblized data that
the printer can interpret. When you nibblize data, you divide each byte of
data into two bytes.
For example:
byte 0xAB becomes two bytes: 0x41, 0x42 or text string “AB”
To manually download an outline font to your printer
1 Nibblize the font data.
Divide the nibblized data into separate lines preceded by the j
command. (For more information, see the “Outline Font, Download”
command on page 147.) Remember to wrap the entire line in <STX>
and ;<ETX>. You need short lines for limited message length protocols
and to make modifying easier by using an editor or word processing
program.
2 Include IPL commands to instruct the printer what to do with the font
data. For help, see the following example and Chapter 7, “IPL
Command Reference.”
3 Send the commands to the printer using one of the methods described
in Chapter 1.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 17

Chapter 2 — Downloading Fonts to the Printer

This is an example of a nibblized outline font file that includes IPL

commands to send it directly to a printer.

Nibblized Outline Font File Example

Command Definition
<STX>R<ESC>C<ESC>P<ETX> Enter Program mode.
<STX>J03,Times,1;<ETX> Create TrueType font 3 and give it the
name Times.
<STX>j0001000000110100000400604c545348efe24cd00000;<ETX> TrueType data string.
<STX>j00ebf468646d78d956f5ab0001135800001508686561;<ETX> TrueType data string.
<STX>j0d2000012f04000006a3706f7374d43c8176000135a8;<ETX> TrueType data string.
: Several TrueType data strings not
: shown due to space constraints.
:
<STX>j00b3008200b0008725ba0000;<ETX> Last TrueType data string.
<STX>R<ETX> Exit Program mode.

Using Third-Party Software Applications to Download Fonts

Use your third-party software to download fonts into a user-defined font
format that the printer can interpret. Refer to your third-party
documentation for more information.

18 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

This chapter explains how to design and print your own labels using IPL
commands. It covers the basic elements of label design and provides
examples to guide you in designing your own labels.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 19

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Introduction to Formats
To print a label on an Intermec printer, you must create a label format, send
that format to the printer, send data to fill in the fields in the format, and
then print the label.
A format is a template that defines how the information prints on a label.
For example, if you want to print a number on a label, the format must
indicate the location of the number, its font and size, and whether the
number has a vertical or horizontal orientation.
You can define a format either by downloading IPL commands or by using
a label generation program. The printer stores the format in its RAM or
flash module. You can use the format at any time. You can call it up to print
labels, or call it up in Program mode to modify one or more of its fields on
the host.
If you intend to regularly reload a format, you can use the temporary
format parameter (*) with some printers. The use of format * results is an
optimal use of flash-based storage memory because the printer stores it in
RAM and deletes it when the printer power is turned off.

Tutorial for Designing and Creating a Label Format

Label formats are composed of several different fields that determine where
and how different types of data appear in the label design. The fields on a
label may differ in size, location, orientation, and data type. You must
define information that you plan to print on the label as a field in the label
format. Once you define the fields, you can pass data into the fields and
print them.
This tutorial assumes that you are using IPL commands.
To design a basic label format
1 Using a label from your roll of media, sketch an example of a format
that you want to create. Your format can include any or all of these
fields:
• Human-readable
• Bar code
• Line
• Box
• User-defined characters (UDCs) or graphics
In this example, you will design a simple label that includes a human-
readable field, a line field, and a bar code field.
2 Determine the placement of each field from the label origin. The label
origin (oØ,Ø) is the top left corner of the label.

20 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

• To determine the horizontal or X origin of each field, measure the

distance from the left side of the label to the upper left corner of the
field.
• To determine the vertical or Y origin of each field, measure the
distance from the top of the label to the upper left corner of the field.

Note: On the 4400, 7421, and PC41 printers, be sure to use the label
width command to set the actual width of your labels; otherwise, the Y
origins will be incorrect.

When you combine the two numbers, they form the field origin oX,Y.
In the illustration below, the horizontal or X origin of the human-
readable field measures 12.7 mm (0.5 in) from the left side of the label
and the vertical or Y origin measures 6.35 mm (0.25 in) from the top of
the label.

field origin = X, Y Label motion from printer

label origin = oØ,Ø y
0.25"
➤

x ➤ THIS IS THE SAMPLE LABEL

0.5"

Code
39
label

IPL.002

3 Convert the measurements for the human-readable field from inches to

dots. Use this equation:
25.4 mm (1 in) = 203 dots
1 mm = 16 dots
In this example, the human-readable field origin in dots is:
12.7 mm (0.5 in) x 203 dots = 102 dots (X dimension)
6.35 mm (0.25 in) x 203 dots = 51 dots (Y dimension)
The origin for the human-readable field is o102,51 (oX,Y).

Note: If you have a 300 dpi or 406 dpi printer, substitute your dpi
where you see 203 dots in these equations.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 21

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

4 Convert the measurements for the line field and the bar code field to
complete this example.
To create or program the label format
1 Choose a bar code symbology and a human-readable font that suit your
needs.
For this example, you are going to use the proportional outline font and
the Code 39 symbology. See Chapter 7, “IPL Command Reference,” for
information on the different symbologies and fonts available to you.
2 Define the parameters for each type of field in the format.

Field Type in Label Represented By

Human-readable H
Bar code B
Line L
Box W
User-defined characters (UDCs) or graphics U

See “Commands Listed by Task” on page 68 for a list of the parameters

you can define for each type of field. For example, you need to define
the following parameters for a human-readable field:

Parameter Value for this Example

Field type H0
Field origin o102,51
Font c25 (outline font)
Field direction f0 (horizontal)
Height h20 (multiplied 20 times)
Width w20 (multiplied 20 times)
Field source and number of characters d0,30

3 Create command strings for each type of field. You must bracket your
field information between the start of text character (<STX>) and the
end of text character (<ETX>).
When you combine the parameters in the previous table into a
command string, it should look like this:
<STX>H0;o102,51;c25;f0;h20;w20;d0,30;<ETX>

22 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

4 Combine the command strings you defined into one file and add the
following commands bracketed by <STX> and <ETX>:

Command Description
<ESC>C Selects Advanced mode
<ESC>P Enters Program mode
E4;F4; Erases what was in format 4 and creates a new format 4
R Saves the format and exits to Print mode
<ESC>E4 Accesses format 4
<ETB> Prints the format

5 Create the data lines for the human-readable field and the bar code field.
Do this by completing the following tasks:
a Type the information that you want to appear in the human-
readable field and the bar code field in two separate lines.
b Separate the information with a <CR> at the end of the first text
string.
The <CR> tells the printer to enter the text into different fields. The
first line will be the text for the human-readable field and so on.
c Preface the data lines with the <CAN> command. It erases all data in
the current format.
Your command strings should look like this:

Command String Definition

<CAN> Erases all data in current format
THIS IS THE SAMPLE LABEL<CR> Text for the human-readable field
SAMPLE Text for the bar code field

d Bracket the command strings between <STX> and <ETX>.

6 Combine all of the command strings into one format and it should look
like the following example.

Note: The difference between the lowercase letter “l” and the numeral
“1” is not very noticeable in the Courier font. Make sure that you enter
the correct command.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 23

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Sample Label Command Strings

Command Definition
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> Select Advanced mode
<STX><ESC>P<ETX> Enter Program mode
<STX>E4;F4;<ETX> Erase format 4, create format 4
<STX>H0;o102,51;f0;c25;h20;w20;d0,30;<ETX> Edit/create human-readable field 0
<STX>L1;o102,102;f0;l575;w5;<ETX> Edit/create line field 1
<STX>B2;o203,153;c0,0;h100;w2;i1;d0,10;<ETX> Edit/create Code 39 bar code field 2 with interpretive
field enabled
<STX>I2;h1;w1;c20;<ETX> Create interpretive field to go with bar code field 2
<STX>R;<ETX> Save format and exit to Print mode
<STX><ESC>E4<ETX> Access format 4
<STX><CAN><ETX> Erase all data
<STX>THIS IS THE SAMPLE LABEL<CR><ETX> Data for human-readable field 0
<STX>SAMPLE<ETX> Data for bar code field 2
<STX><ETB><ETX> Print

Note: The line breaks in the preceding example are shown for formatting
purposes only and do not necessarily represent carriage returns.

THIS IS THE SAMPLE LABEL

*SAMPLE*

IPL004.eps

Sample Label

24 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Defining Label Design Fields

Define each type of field to hold a certain type of data. You can define:
• Bar code fields (with or without interpretive fields)
• Human-readable fields
• Graphic fields
• Line fields
• Box fields
You must define the data you plan to print on your label as a field in the
label format. Each field type gives you options for interpreting your data.
The fields that contain the most options are bar code fields and human-
readable fields.

Bar Code Fields

You can print bar codes in any of these symbologies:

• Codabar • Code 93 • MaxiCode

• Code 2 of 5 • Code 128 • MicroPDF 417
• Code 11 • Code One • QR Code
• Code 16K • Data Matrix • PDF 417
• Code 39 • HIBC • POSTNET
• Code 49 • Interleaved 2 of 5 • UPC/EAN

See Chapter 7, “IPL Command Reference,” for a complete list of

commands to select the appropriate bar code symbology. “Commands
Listed by Task” on page 68 lists the command options available for editing
bar code fields.

Human-Readable Fields
You can print human-readable fields in any one of the printer’s internal
fonts or user-defined fonts. The printer contains several resident bitmap
fonts in a range of sizes and styles.
You can change the size of the font character by using the width and height
magnification or by using the pitch or point-size commands. The fonts
themselves remain unchanged. The font character charts in Appendix B,
“Character Sets,” illustrate the complete character set for each font.
The printer supports nine different international character sets for each
command set mode. In Emulation mode, the international character
substitution is compatible with Intermec 8636/8646 printers. In Advanced
mode, the substitution complies with the ISO standards. The printer may
also contain character sets for IBM translation and code pages.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 25

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

The internal bitmap fonts of the printer include:

• Standard bitmap fonts measured in dots
• Bitmap fonts recognized by optical character recognition (OCR)
programs
• Bitmap fonts measured in point sizes
• Outline fonts
• Bitmap monospaced fonts

Line and Box Fields

Use the command set (see Chapter 7, “IPL Command Reference”) to
define line or box fields on a label. You can use the commands to determine
whether a box or line appears vertically or horizontally and to set the line
length and thickness.
The following example uses vertical and horizontal lines to separate fields
on a label and uses a box field to make a label border. This format uses bold
text to highlight the lines that contain line or box fields. This label format
prints the label shown on the next page.

Lines and Boxes Format

<STX><ESC>C0<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P;<ETX>
<STX>E4;F4,DEMO 4;<ETX>
<STX>L1;o11,447;f0;l1207;w4;<ETX>
<STX>L2;o11,285;f0;l1207;w4;<ETX>
<STX>W3;o11,0;f0;l1207;h802;w4;<ETX>
<STX>B4;o658,650;f0;h102;w2;c0,0;i1;r1;d0,11;<ETX>
<STX>I4;o658,752;f0;h1;w1;c20;r0;b0;<ETX>
<STX>B5;o87,650;f0;h102;w2;c0,0;i1;r1;d0,11;<ETX>
<STX>I5;o87,752;f0;h1;w1;c20;r0;b0;<ETX>
<STX>H6;o34,183;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,17;<ETX>
<STX>H7;o35,143;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,BASIS WT. 39-4838;<ETX>
<STX>H8;o389,305;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,ROLLS;<ETX>
<STX>H9;o40,305;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,ROLL WIDTH;<ETX>
<STX>L10;o11,609;f0;l1207;w4;<ETX>
<STX>H12;o1022,508;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,7;<ETX>
<STX>H13;o1022,467;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,WEIGHT;<ETX>
<STX>H14;o539,508;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,11;<ETX>
<STX>H15;o539,467;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,LOCATION;<ETX>
<STX>H16;o42,508;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,15;<ETX>
<STX>H17;o43,467;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER;<ETX>
<STX>H18;o840,346;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,13;<ETX>
<STX>H19;o840,305;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,ORDER ITEM NUMBER;<ETX>
<STX>H20;o389,346;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,7;<ETX>
<STX>H21;o34,346;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,11;<ETX>
<STX>H22;o747,183;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,15;<ETX>
<STX>H23;o743,143;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,GRADE DESCRIPTION;<ETX>
<STX>H24;o13,0;f0;h51;w34;c25;r0;b3;d3, SHIPPING LABEL ;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E4<CAN><ETX>
<STX><ESC>F4<LF>INTERMEC<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F5<LF>372181192<ETX>

26 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

<STX><ESC>F6<LF>38448379237<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F12<LF>230<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F14<LF>3839494<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F16<LF>372181192<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F18<LF>234-LOFT<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F20<LF>12<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F21<LF>338438<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F22<LF>A-PLUS QTY<ETX>
<STX><ETB><FF><ETX>

SHIPPING LABEL
BASIS WT. 39-4838 GRADE DESCRIPTION

38448379237 A - PLUS QTY

ROLL WIDTH ROLLS ORDER ITEM NUMBER

338438 12 234 - LOFT

CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER LOCATION WEIGHT

372181192 3839494 230

INTERMEC 372181192

IPL006.eps

Sample Label in Lines and Boxes Format: This illustration shows the label printed using the
command strings.

Graphic Fields
You must define a graphic field if you want to print a graphic image on a
label. Before you can use this field, you need to download the graphic to the
printer. Once you download the graphic, you can use it in any format.
Use the PrintSet printer installation software to easily download graphics to
the printer. PrintSet automatically converts the graphic into a six bits per
byte format that your printer can understand.
If you are using third-party label-generation software, it converts your
graphic file to a UDC format that the printer can interpret and downloads
it to the printer.
If you want to design your own graphic, refer to “Creating User-Defined
Bitmap Graphics” on page 176. You must send graphics as either one bit
per byte or six bits per byte bitmap images. The maximum size that you can
define a graphic to be is limited by the capacity of your printer. The
maximum size can be increased to 4 inches by 4 (1600 dots by 1600 dots)
inches if you install expansion RAM. Due to message length constraints,
you must design large graphics in the six bits per byte format.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 27

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

You can use Direct Graphics mode to reduce the time it takes to download
and print an image. For more information on direct graphics, see Appendix
E, “Using Direct Graphics Mode.”

Editing Label Formats and Working With Fields

In addition to understanding the different types of printable fields on the
printer, you need to know how to arrange them to define or change the
format of a label. The following sections use examples to describe the
commands that position, size, rotate, and edit label fields. For a complete
list of all programming commands, see Chapter 6, “Finding IPL
Commands in This Manual.”
Whenever you create a format, the printer automatically creates a human-
readable field zero (H0) along with it. The printer creates the H0 field with
all field parameters set to the default setting. You can only delete field zero
after you create one or more other fields. You cannot delete the last field in
a format.

Defaults for the H0 Field

Command Definition
o0,0; Field origin is 0,0.
f0; Field direction is horizontal with respect to the label motion from printer.
h1; Field height magnification is one.
w1; Field width magnification is one.
c2; Selects the 10 x 14 standard font.
b0; Selects no border around human-readable field.
r0; Selects horizontal orientation of characters.
d0,30; You enter variable data in Print mode. The maximum number of characters
you can enter into this field is 30.

When creating a new format field, it is not possible to specify field zero as
anything other than human-readable field zero (H0) without creating
another field first. For example, you cannot make field zero a bar code field
by doing the following:
<STX><ESC>P;E1;F1;B0;<ETX>
To make field zero a bar code field, you have to delete human-readable field
0 and then define bar code field 0. To do this, you must create a temporary
field (L39) before you delete human-readable field zero (H0):
<STX><ESC>P;E1;F1;L39;D0;B0;D39;<ETX>

28 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

The next table describes each command in the string.

Label Format Editing Command Examples

Command Definition
<ESC>P; Enters Program mode
E1; Erases format 1
F1; Creates format 1
L39; Creates line field (temporary field)
D0; Deletes field zero
B0; Creates bar code field zero
D39; Deletes the temporary line field

When numbering the fields in a format, it is important to remember to give

every field a different number. Never use a field number more than once.
You can have up to 200 fields numbering from 0 to 199. The importance of
field numbering comes into play when you are in Print mode and are
entering data into the label format. At this point, you can only identify the
fields by a number, not by the type of field.
Each bar code field can have an interpretive field associated with it. For
example, bar code field B33 would have an interpretive field I33. All
interpretive fields use up a field location, starting from the top of the field
directory; if B33 is the first bar code field with interpretive text, then field
I33 would use location 199. You can see how the printer uses the fields
internally by uploading the format and examining where the interpretives
appear. For help, see the Format, Transmit command on page 105. If you
need to use more fields than IPL can accommodate in a single format
(because of interpretive fields), you can use pages to combine several
formats on one label.
Also keep in mind that you enter data into fields according to their numeric
value if you use a <CR> to separate the data. In other words, the first string
of data you enter goes into the lowest numbered field, the second string of
data you enter goes into the next lowest numbered field, and so on.

Editing Existing Fields

If you make a mistake in a label format, you may not have to download the
entire format again depending on the severity of the mistake. You can
change a specific field in a format by sending a command in Program
mode. You can modify just the incorrect format fields instead of having to
download the entire format again.
When the printer is in Program mode, it uses a field pointer to point to the
field to be modified. The pointer continues to point to the most recently
selected field until you select a different format or field.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 29

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

For the next example, assume that you used the following format:

Sample Format
Command Description
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> Selects Advanced
mode
<STX><ESC>P<ETX> Enters Program
mode
<STX>E3;F3;<ETX> Erases format 3,
Creates format 3
<STX>H0;o80,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> Creates field H0
<STX>H1;o80,120;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> Creates field H1
<STX>H2;o80,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;<ETX> Creates field H2
<STX>H3;o80,190;f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> Creates field H3
<STX>B4;o80,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;p@;<ETX> Creates field B3
<STX>R;<ETX> Saves and exits to
Print mode

To change the height and width of field 3 to 2 dots, download this

command string:
<STX><ESC>P;F3;H3;h2;w2;R;<ETX>
The following table describes each command in this string:

Field Editing Commands in the Sample Format

Command Description
<ESC>P; Enters Program mode
F3; Accesses format number 3 from memory
H3; Accesses field 3
h2; Sets the height to 2 dots
w2; Sets the width to 2 dots
R; Returns to Print mode

Note: The <STX> and <ETX> commands mark the beginning and end of
a message. The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. Except for the
last command in a message, all commands in Program mode must end with
this terminator.

Deleting Fields
It is possible to delete any field from a format except for the last field. Use
the following command string to delete field 3 from format 4.
<STX><ESC>P;F4;D3;R;<ETX>

30 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

The following table describes each command in this string:

Command String Descriptions

Command Description
<ESC>P; Enters Program mode
F4; Accesses format 4
D3; Deletes field 3
R; Returns to Print mode

Positioning Fields
Using the IPL command language to position fields is the trickiest part of
designing labels. Since you cannot tell exactly how the field looks until it
prints, you may need to make several test prints before you get the field
positioned correctly.
For all types of fields, determine the print position by defining the
coordinates of the upper left corner of the unrotated field.
The field origin is the upper left corner of an unrotated field. To define the
coordinates of the field origin, use the origin command (oX,Y) where o is
the command that specifies origin, X is the distance from the left side of the
label, and Y is the distance from the top of the label.

Note: On the 4400, 7421, and PC41 printers, be sure to use the label
width command to set the printer for the correct label width; otherwise, the
Y origins will be incorrect.

The X and Y coordinates of the field origin use dots as their form of
measurement. There are 203 dots per inch or 8 dots per millimeter.

Note: The 3400e with 400 dots per inch, 3240, and 3440 printers have
406 dots per inch or 16 dots per mm. The 4X30 printers have 300 dots per
inch or 12 dots per mm.
To position a field to print approximately 0.25 inch from the left side and
0.5 inch from the top of your label, the origin command is o51,102.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 31

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

A
HR Field Second HR Field
B

*BCFIELD*
*BC FIELD*

A = o51, 102 C = o51, 305

B = o51, 203 D = o355, 102 IPL007.eps

Field Positioning: This illustration shows the relative positions of four fields with
different origin points.

Note: If you are operating your printer in Emulation mode, the dot sizes
are doubled (101 dots per inch or 4 dots per mm), so the origin for 1 inch
from the top of the label and 0.5 inch from the left side is o25,51.

Rotating Fields
You can rotate any type of printable field in increments of 90 degrees
counterclockwise around the field origin. To position a rotated field, you
should keep in mind that the field origin remains on the corner where it
was before you rotated the field. If you rotate a field 90 degrees
counterclockwise, the origin that was at the upper left corner is now at the
lower left corner. Use the Field Direction command fn to define the field
rotation. See Chapter 7, “IPL Command Reference,” for more information.
• To rotate a field 90 degrees, you must position the lower left corner of
the rotated field.
• To rotate a field 180 degrees, you must position the lower right corner
of the rotated field.
• To rotate a field 270 degrees, you must position the upper right corner
of the rotated field.

32 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

f1(rotated 90 degrees)

ABCDE
ABCDE
Field origin

ABCDE
f2 (rotated 180 degrees)
ABCDE f0 (horizontal)

f3 (rotated 270 degrees)

Field Rotation: This illustration shows the effects of rotating a field by using the Field
Direction command.

Scaling Fields
You can determine the size of a field by the font or graphic you use and the
field magnification factors you apply. The human-readable fonts and bar
code symbologies have default sizes, and the user-defined character fields
print as large as you design them (up to the maximum), but you can scale
each of these fields even further by using magnification commands.

Magnifying Fonts and Character Fields

The internal fonts in the printer already have sizes associated with them.
For example, the letters in font c0 are 7 dots wide by 9 dots high, with a
1-dot gap between characters. If you design a field that prints 10 letters in
font c0, the field will be 79 dots wide by 9 dots high.
By applying magnification factors (h for height and w for width), you can
increase a field’s height or width. If you increase the height to 2 (h2) for the
field described above, the field height doubles, and the final field prints 79
dots long by 18 dots high. If you change the height magnification to h3,
the field height triples, and the field prints 79 dots by 27 dots.
The default human-readable field H0 prints the 7 x 9 font as follows
(assuming you enter the word “example” as data):

IPL.009

When you apply a magnification factor of 3 to human-readable field H0,

the font now prints the image below:

IPL.010

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 33

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Increasing the width of a text field to 2 makes each letter in the field twice
as wide. If you did this to the example above, with field height h2, the final
field would print 158 dots wide by 18 dots high.
When you magnify a bitmap font, the edges of the characters become
jagged. If you want to print large text characters (greater than 1 inch or
2.54 cm), use an outline font such as c25 (Swiss Mono 721 standard
outline font).

Magnifying Bar Code Fields

You can also use height and width commands to modify bar code fields, but
the commands do not behave the same as with human-readable fields.
For bar code fields, the height magnification is the actual dot height of the
bar code. If you choose a height magnification of h20, the height of the bar
code field will be 20 dots.
Printing narrow bar codes conserves space on each label as well as media;
however, if you plan to scan bar codes from a distance, you may need to
magnify the bar code widths.
The width magnification factor for bar code fields refers to the width of the
narrowest element of the bar code. When you specify a narrow element
width of w3, the width of the narrowest element in the symbology is 3 dots
wide. The spaces and large element widths grow according to preset ratios
for each symbology.

Note: You can only print a bar width of 1 if you are printing in drag mode
(bars perpendicular to the print head). If you select a width of 1 in picket
mode (bars parallel to the print head), the printer defaults to 2.

The default height for bar code fields is 50 dots, and the default width for
narrow elements is 1 dot.

Note: If you are using the POSTNET symbology, follow the rules for
magnifying fonts.

Designing Pages
A page is a collection of one or more formats that you combine to print at
the same time. This feature is helpful when you need to print several
different labels for an application at once. For example, you may need to
attach one type of label to a product and a different type of label to its
container. With the page printing capability, you can print both labels at
the same time. Because you can print pages of several formats at once, you
can also print labels on media rolls that have different sizes and shapes of
labels already precut.
When you group label formats into a page, you assign the formats to
positions designated by the letters a through z. You can print the formats
used in pages independent of each other. The next example shows how to
create a page that contains five different formats.

34 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Label Format - Example

The format example on this page is a complex label designed to
demonstrate the different types of data that you can print with your printer.
This example contains human-readable fields, a bar code field, line fields, a
box field, and a graphic field (the diamond).

Cat.
No. 432-3221 Std.
Qty. 100
S 3
i
z
e 14 DUPLEX ANGLE CONNECTOR
- For Flexible Steel Conduit and .375" - .625"
Lot 23455 262948

Diameter Armored and Nonmetallic Sheath Cables

- For Smooth or Interlocking Sheath Metal Clad

Cables .375" - .675" Dia. (UL only)

ACE CORP.
ADDRESS 3010 *30791751*
*307 91747*
FICTION USA

IPL011.eps

Complex Label: This illustration shows a label that includes human-readable, box, bar
code, line, and graphic fields.

Graphic for Example

Download the six bits per byte diamond graphic explained in “Creating Six
Bits Per Byte User-Defined Graphics” on page 179.

Format for Example

<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E5;F5;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o35,40;c25;d3,Cat.;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o35,70;c25;d3,No.;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H2;o165,0;c25;d3,432-3221;k36;<ETX>
<STX>H3;o785,40;c25;d3,Std.;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H4;o785,70;c25;d3,Qty.;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H5;o915,0;c25;d3,100;k36;<ETX>
<STX>L6;o740,10;f3;l130;w8;<ETX>
<STX>L7;o25,140;l1130;w8;<ETX>
<STX>H8;o30,165;c25;f3;r1;d3,Size;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H9;o80,170;c25;d3,1 ”;k30;<ETX>
<STX>H10;o150,165;f3;r1;c25;d3,3/4;h3;w7;<ETX>
<STX>L11;o300,140;f3;l130;w8;<ETX>
<STX>L12;o25,270;l275;w8;<ETX>

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 35

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

<STX>H13;o60,560;f1;c25;d0,20;h3;w2;<ETX>
<STX>L14;o140,270;f3;l310;w8;<ETX>
<STX>H15;o360,120;c22;d3,DUPLEX ANGLE CONNECTOR;h3;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H16;o170,320;c25;d3,- For Flexible Steel Conduit and .375” -
.625”;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H17;o212,375;c25;d3,Diameter Armored and Nonmetallic Sheath
Cables;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H18;o170,450;c25;d3,- For Smooth or Interlocking Sheath Metal
Clad;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H19;o212,505;c25;d3,Cables .375” - .675” Dia. (UL only);k12;<ETX>
<STX>L20;o25,580;l1130;w8;<ETX>
<STX>U21;o40,610;c2;h9;w9;<ETX>
<STX>H22;o210,600;c25;d3,ACE CORP.;k24;<ETX>
<STX>H23;o210,670;c25;d3,ADDRESS 3010;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H24;o210,710;c25;d3,FICTION USA;k12;<ETX>
<STX>B25;o685,615;c0,0;d0,20;i1;h100;p@;<ETX>
<STX>I25;h2;w2;<ETX>
<STX>L26;o590,580;f3;l185;w8;<ETX>
<STX>W27;o015,000;w10;l1150;h775;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>

Data for Example

<STX><ESC>E5<CAN><ETX>
<STX>Lot 23455 262948<CR><FS>307 91747<FS><ESC>I2<ETX>
<STX><RS>5<ETB><ETX>

Use the <STX> and <ETX> characters to mark the beginning and end of
the command strings. The other characters are explained in the following
table. Most of the printer command lines explained below contain
commands previously not discussed in this chapter. Refer to previous
examples for clarification of the lines that are not explained, or see Chapter
7, “IPL Command Reference,” for a further explanation of the command
language.

Label Format Example Command Descriptions

Command Description
<ESC>C Selects Advanced mode.
<ESC>P Selects Program mode.
E5;F5; Erases anything previously stored as format five and accesses the location for format five.
H0; Defines field 0 as a human-readable field.
o35,40; Sets the origin of field 0 at coordinates (35,40).
c25; Sets the font for field 0 to font 25.z
d3,Cat.; Sets the data for field 0 to have the constant value: Cat.
k12; Sets the point size to 12.
L6; Defines field 6 as a line field.
o740,10; Sets the origin for field 6 at (740,10).
f3; Rotates field 6 by 270 degrees counterclockwise around the field origin.
l130; Sets the length of the line in field 6 to 130 dots.
w8; Sets the width of field 6 to 8 dots.
H8; Defines field 8 as a human-readable field.

36 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Label Format Example Command Descriptions (continued)

Command Description
o30,165; Sets the origin of field 8 at (30,165).
c25; Defines the font for field 8 as font 25.
f3; Rotates field 8 by 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin.
r1; Rotates the characters in field 8 by 90 degrees counterclockwise.
d3,Size; Defines the constant data for field 8.
k12; Sets the point size to 12.
H10; Defines field 10 as a human-readable field.
o150,165; Sets the origin for field 10 at (150,165).
f3; Rotates field 10 by 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin.
r1; Rotates the characters in field 10 by 90 degrees counterclockwise.
c25; Sets the font for field 10 to font 25.
d3,3/4; Defines constant data for field 10.
k12; Sets the point size to 12.
H13; Defines field 13 as a human-readable field.
o60,560; Sets the origin of field 13 at (60,560).
f1; Rotates field 13 by 90 degrees around the origin.
c25; Determines that field 13 prints in font 25.
d0,20; Specifies that data for field 13 will be entered during Print mode and that the data will be a maximum
of 20 characters long.
k10; Sets the point size to 10.
U21; Defines field 21 as a graphic field.
o40,610; Sets the origin of field 21 at (40,610).
c2; Determines that field 21 prints in font two.
h9; Sets the height to nine times the original size.
w9; Sets the width to 9 dots.
B25; Defines field 25 as a bar code field.
o685,615; Sets the origin of field 25 at (685,615).
c0,0; Sets the bar code font to Code 39 with no check digit.
d0,20; Determines that the data for field 25 is entered during Print mode and its maximum length is 20
characters.
i1; Determines that an interpretation of the bar code prints with start and stop characters included.
h100; Determines that the bar code height is 100 dots.
p@; Clears all prefixes from the bar code field.
I25 Edits the interpretive field for bar code field 25.
h2 Sets the height of the interpretive field to twice its original height.
w2 Sets the width of the interpretive field to 2 dots.
W27; Defines field 27 as a box field.
o015,000; Sets the origin of field 27 at 15,0.
w10; Defines the line width of the box as 10 dots.
l1150; Defines the length of the box as 1150.
h775; Sets the height of the box to 775.
R Sets the printer in Print mode.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 37

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Label Format Example Command Descriptions (continued)

Command Description
<ESC>E5 Accesses format 5 from the printer memory.
<CAN> Clears all host-entered data for the current format and sets the field pointer to the lowest numbered
data-entry field.
Lot 23455 This is the data intended for the first data-entry field. <CR> instructs the printer to go to the next data-
262948<CR> entry field.
<FS> Specifies that the following data is to be incremented.
307 91747 This is the data intended for the next data-entry field (specified as data to be incremented).
<FS> Specifies that the preceding data is to be incremented.
<ESC>I2 The data surrounded by <FS> commands is to be incremented by a value of 2 after each label is
printed.
<RS>5 Sets the number of labels to print when the print command is executed.
<ETB> Tells the printer to print the label.

Label Format - RFID Example

The format on this page is a bar code label that contains an RFID tag.

Label With RFID Tag

Format for RFID Example

<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E4;F4;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o102,51;f0;c25;h20;w20;d0,30;<ETX>
<STX>L1;o102,102;f0;l575;w5;<ETX>
<STX>B2;o203,153;c0,0;h100;w2;i1;d0,10;<ETX>
<STX>I2;h1;w1;c20;<ETX>
<STX>Q3;a2,2,0,23;d3,MY FIRST RFID TAG WRITE;<ETX>
<STX>R;<ETX>

Data for RFID Example

<STX><ESC>E4<ETX>
<STX><CAN><ETX>
<STX>MY FIRST RFID TAG WRITE<CR><ETX>
<STX>SAMPLE<ETX>
<STX><ESC>J2,2,0,23<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>

38 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Use the <STX> and <ETX> characters to mark the beginning and end of
the command strings. The other characters are explained in the following
table. Most of the printer command lines explained below contain
commands previously not discussed in this chapter. Refer to previous
examples for clarification of the lines that are not explained, or see Chapter
7, “IPL Command Reference,” for a further explanation of the command
language.

Label Format – RFID Example Command Descriptions

Command Description
<ESC>C Selects Advanced mode.
<ESC>P Selects Program mode.
E4;F4; Erases anything previously stored as format four and accesses the location for format four.
H0; Defines field 0 as a human-readable field.
o102,51; Sets the origin of field 0 at coordinates (102,51).
f0; Does not rotate field 0.
c25; Sets the font to font 25.
h20; Sets the height to 20 times original size.
w20; Sets the width to 20 times original size.
d0,30; Defines the variable data to be up to 30 characters.
L1; Defines field 1 as a line field.
o102,102; Sets the origin of field 1 at coordinates (102,102).
f0; Rotates field 1 by 90 degrees counterclockwise around the origin.
l575; Defines the length of the line as 575.
w5; Sets the width of the line to 5 dots.
B2; Defines field 2 as a bar code field.
o203,153; Sets the origin of field 2 at coordinates (203,153).
c0,0; Sets the bar code font to Code 39 with no check digit.
h100; Sets the height to 100 dots.
w2; Sets the width to 2 dots.
i1; Determines that an interpretation of the bar code prints with start and stop characters included.
d0,10; Defines the variable data to be up to 10 characters.
I2; Defines field 2 to include an interpretive field with the bar code field.
h1; Sets the height to original size.
w1; Sets the width to original size.
c20; Sets the font to font 20.
Q3; Defines field 3 to be an RFID field.
a2,2,0,23 Sets the format to ASCII, writes to the Data segment, starts on byte 0 and writes up to 23 bytes.
d3,MY FIRST Defines constant data for field 3 to be “MY FIRST RFID TAG WRITE.”
RFID TAG
WRITE
R Sets the printer in Print mode
<ESC>E4 Accesses format 4 from the printer memory.
<CAN> Clears all host-entered data for the current format and sets the field pointer to the lowest numbered
data-entry field.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 39

Chapter 3 — Designing Bar Code Labels

Label Format – RFID Example Command Descriptions (continued)

Command Description
MY FIRST This is the data intended for the first data-entry field (human-readable field 0). <CR> instructs the
RFID TAG printer to go to the next data-entry field.
WRITE<CR>
SAMPLE This is the data intended for the second data-entry field (bar code field 2).
<ESC>J2,2,0 Reads the data from the RFID tag. The data is in ASCII format on the Data segment, starting on byte
,23 0 and having a length of 23 bytes.
<ETB> Tells the printer to print the label.

40 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 4 Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the problems that may occur as a result of using
IPL commands incorrectly. If you do not find your problem listed here,
see the troubleshooting information in your printer user’s manual.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 41

Chapter 4 — Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Checklist
Even though Intermec designed your printer to operate under harsh
conditions, you may still encounter error messages. You can easily fix most
of the errors you encounter and consequently not delay operation of the
printer for very long.
If you receive an error message or encounter a functional problem with the
printer, you should perform these steps:
To troubleshoot your printer
1 Send a <BEL> command to the printer and see if the printer sends an
error message to the host in response.
2 If there is an error message, find it in the section called “Interpreting
Error Codes and Solving Problems” on page 44. Follow the
instructions in the table to correct the problem.
Or:
If the printer does not send an error message to the host, try to locate
the symptom in the “Printer Operation Problems” and “Print Quality
Problems” sections of the printer user’s manual. Follow the instructions
in the manual to correct the problem.
3 Clean the printer components and check all connections. See your user’s
manual for instructions.
4 If the problem persists, contact Intermec Product Support (1-800-755-
5505) in North America. If you are an international customer, contact
your local Intermec representative.

How the Printer Handles Error Conditions

This section describes how the printer handles error conditions that may
occur while you use IPL commands.

Syntax Errors
The printer responds to syntax errors in the messages it receives from the
host by attempting to execute the commands. It does not ignore a
command with a syntax error; instead, the printer produces output, even if
it is wrong. This output helps determine what went wrong and what should
be done to correct the problem.

42 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 4 — Troubleshooting

Parameter Errors
Certain commands require optional parameters. If you do not supply these
parameters, the printer substitutes default values. If a parameter is above its
maximum range limit, the printer uses the maximum value. If it falls below
the minimum range, the printer uses the minimum value. See Chapter 7,
“IPL Command Reference,” for the range and default value for each
command.

Image Overrun Errors

Image overrun occurs when a label is too complex to image for a given print
speed. An overrun will cause the printer to abort the label being printed.
This error is most common on labels over 12.7 cm (5 in) long.
The printer automatically attempts to correct for this error condition by
resetting to the lowest print speed and to the highest number of image
bands, then repeats printing the label. The printer remains at this setting
until you reset it. If an image overrun still occurs, printing for that batch of
labels stops and the printer executes any following commands.

Note: Installing optional memory expansion may decrease image overrun

errors.

Invalid Numeric Character Errors

If you include non-numeric characters within a numeric data string in a
command, the printer ignores them and continues to process the rest of the
valid numeric characters. If a non-numeric character begins the numeric
data string, however, the printer uses a default value for the affected
command.
Here are two examples of valid numeric character strings and one example
of an invalid string:
12a valid
1a2 valid
a12 invalid

Insufficient Storage Memory Errors

Before storing new formats, graphics, or user-defined fonts in the static
RAM or flash, the printer ensures that it has sufficient memory to store
them. If there is insufficient memory, the printer ignores the last editing
session. The printer preserves the existing data in the storage memory.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 43

Chapter 4 — Troubleshooting

Interpreting Error Codes and Solving Problems

Most of the problems you may encounter cause the printer to send an error
code to the host. To correct the error, find the error code in the following
table and complete the instructions in the solution column.

Error Codes and Possible Solutions

Error
Code Description of Problem Solution
00 No error. No action is necessary.
02 Invalid number of bar code characters Verify the number of bar code characters used. For more
(UPC/EAN). information, see the “Bar Code, Select Type” command on
page 126.
06 Invalid supplemental character count Make sure that the supplemental data consists of either two
(UPC/EAN). or five characters.
07 More than one supplemental delimiter Make sure that you have only one supplemental delimiter
(UPC/EAN). (“.”) between the bar code data and the supplemental data.
11 Invalid bar code data. Verify data in the label format.
12 Data count exceeded. Data count should not exceed what is specified for the field.
13 Entering data in non-data entry field. Check the field for accuracy.
21 Quantity or batch count out of range. Quantity of labels or number of batches should be between
1 and 9999.
22 Field increment/decrement out of range. Quantity should be between 1 and 9999.
23 Intercharacter/message delay out of range. Delay should be between 0 and 9999.
24 Missing preamble/postamble data. Change the configuration command to no preamble/
postamble or include preamble/postamble data.
25 Invalid format transmission syntax. Check the Format, Transmit command syntax. The correct
syntax is <ESC>xn with n ranging from 0 to 19 on most
printers. On some printers, such as the 3440, n ranges from
0 to 99. For more information, see the “Format, Transmit”
command on page 95.
26 Invalid page transmission syntax. Check the Page, Transmit command syntax. The correct
syntax is <ESC>yn with n ranging from 0 to 9.
27 Invalid font transmission syntax. Check the Font, Transmit command syntax. The correct
syntax is <ESC>vn. Values for n vary depending on your
printer model. For more information, see the “Font,
Transmit” command on page 93.
28 Invalid UDC transmission syntax. Check the User-Defined Characters, Transmit command
syntax on page 117. The correct syntax is <ESC>un with n
ranging from 0 to 99.
32 Non-immediate command or data received after Allow the printer to empty the buffer contents before
buffer full. sending commands or data.
33 Invalid field delimiters. Check for all pairs of field delimiters and make sure both are
numeric, or both are alphanumeric.
34 Invalid escape command. Correct the escape command syntax.
35 Invalid data shift command. Correct the shift command syntax.
36 Invalid or undefined format number. Verify that the format numbers are between 0 and 19.
37 Insufficient room in RAM to print format. Reduce the number of data fields in the format or add more
DRAM.

44 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 4 — Troubleshooting

Error Codes and Possible Solutions (continued)

Error
Code Description of Problem Solution
38 Invalid or undefined field number. Verify the field number in the label format.
41 Syntax error for program commands. Check the program command for proper syntax.
42 Insufficient room in RAM to store format. Empty the buffer contents. If the format still does not fit,
delete some fields or other data from the format. You may
have to remove or reduce the UDCs, formats, or fonts if
necessary.
Note: Entering <ESC>m tells the host how much memory
is installed and how much is available.
43 Too many fields in label format. You can use up to 200 fields in a format and each field can
use up to 250 characters. Reduce field size or delete some
fields.
46 Undefined statement. Check the statement syntax.
52 Invalid UDC/UDF bitmap cell height/width or Verify that the UDC/UDF bitmap cell height/width or
intercharacter space. intercharacter space is within the specified values for n. For
more information, see:
• the “Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define”
command on page 127.
• the “User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit”
command on page 155.
• the “Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define” command
on page 145.
53 Insufficient room in RAM to store UDC or UDF. Remove or reduce formats, fonts, or UDCs.
54 Invalid UDC command syntax. Correct the UDC command syntax.
57 Invalid parameter. Correct the syntax.
60 No RFID support. The printer is unable to access the RFID module. Contact
your local Intermec representative.
61 No RFID tag found. The RFID module has determined that the printer does not
have RFID media loaded. Load RFID media. Verify that
the TAGADJUST value aligns the tag over the antenna. For
help, see the “RFID Parameters, Set” command on
page 121.
62 Access outside of the RFID tag memory. The defined RFID tag field specifies a position outside of
the tag’s memory or the tag read/write operation was not
successful (bad tag). Verify that the field specifies a position
within the tag’s memory. For help, see the “RFID Tag Field
Setup” command on page 150.
63 RFID number conversion error. You have entered an invalid hex or numerical (NUM)
format in the data string. Enter a valid value.
64 RFID inactive (off ). You have a printer with an RFID module and you have
defined RFID commands, but you have turned RFID mode
off. Turn RFID mode on. For help, see the “RFID
Parameters, Set” command on page 121.
65 RFID tag type does not support the selected An application has sent a command with an argument that
option. is not supported by the printer’s tag type. Verify that the
application commands match the printer’s tag type.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 45

Chapter 4 — Troubleshooting

46 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 5 Advanced Printer
Programming

This chapter discusses topics for advanced IPL programmers, such as

using printer memory efficiently, increasing throughput, and using
Emulation mode.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 47

Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

Using the Printer Memory Efficiently

To receive the best performance from your printer, you must understand
how to use the printer RAM efficiently. In general, if you use a significant
amount of available memory for storage, you reduce the amount of
memory used for imaging, which decreases printer performance.

How Is the Printer Storage Memory Used?

Although the printer contains enough static RAM or flash to store several
different label formats, downloaded fonts, graphics, and data, you should
be careful of how you use your printer memory.
Printers use either static RAM or flash memory for storing tables, pages,
formats, fonts, and user-defined characters (UDCs). Any storage memory
that you are not using for storage is available for imaging. Some printers
allow you to use PrintSet to adjust the amount of storage memory available
for storage purposes. If you require additional storage memory, you can
purchase a memory expansion option.

Making the Most of Your Storage Memory

There are limits to the number of formats, fonts, graphics, or pages that you
can store in the printer. You can define up to 16 fonts, but there may not be
enough room depending on the amount of memory being used for other
purposes. The more formats, graphics, and fonts you store, the less memory
is available.
When you encounter a memory usage problem, use PrintSet to see how
much memory is available. You must upload the memory information from
the printer first. Refer to the PrintSet online help for more information.
You can increase your available memory by following one of these
suggestions:
• In some printers, you can adjust the amount of RAM allocated for
storage purposes. For help, see the PrintSet software or the “Amount of
Storage, Define” on page 104.
• Increase the amount of available memory by using the Memory Reset
portion of the Test and Service menu. You can use the Memory Reset
command to erase all or part of the information that you have
downloaded to the printer. For help, see your user’s manual.
• Delete any unneeded user-defined fonts, graphics, pages, or formats. For
help, see the PrintSet software or the specific commands in Chapter 7,
“IPL Command Reference.”
• Purchase additional memory. Please contact your Intermec
representative for information on purchasing additional memory for
your printer model.

48 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

Increasing Throughput
Note: This section does not apply to the EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, or PX6i.

To print labels as quickly as possible, you must adjust the print speed in
conjunction with the number of image bands (one image band equals 2.54
cm (1 in) of label). The print speed and image band settings determine the
rate at which the printer processes the images of your labels, which affects
the throughput of the entire printing process.
When the printer receives the command to select a format, <ESC>E, it
immediately begins imaging the label; as a result, the imaging process is
better able to keep up with the print speed and throughput improves. If the
number of image bands is too low, however, the imaging process is unable
to keep up with the print speed, and the printer stops printing and restarts
at the lowest print speed with the maximum number of image bands. If the
image band command is set too high, the printer spends more time than
necessary imaging, and label production is slowed.

What Is an Image Band?

An image band is a section of memory where a picture of a label format is
drawn. This drawing process is known as imaging. Once the picture is
imaged, the printer loads the picture from the image bands to the printhead
for printing. Each image band is equal to 2.54 cm (1 in) of length of the
label format. The number of image bands you use may be less than the
length of the label being printed. The number of image bands (in inches)
does not have to equal the length of the label since the printer recycles the
image bands. Once the contents of an image band have been printed, it
may be reused to image the next section of the label.
Keep in mind that the more complex the label, the longer it will take to
image each section, thus requiring a slower print speed. To use a higher
print speed, use more image bands to allow more of the imaging process to
complete before printing begins.
It is possible to reduce the amount of time necessary to download and
image a graphic by using Direct Graphics mode. In Direct Graphics mode,
the printer images a graphic directly into the image bands without storing it
in the printer. For help, see Appendix E, “Using Direct Graphics Mode.”

How the Image Bands Command Works

The Number of Image Bands, Select command controls the amount of
memory allotted to the imaging process. When you increase the image
band adjustment to a higher number, you are adding more buffers to the
imaging memory. As a result, more of the label format is imaged before
printing begins.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 49

Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

The minimum number of required image bands is dependent upon the

print speed and the complexity of the label. Labels that contain numerous
fields with different rotations, graphics, or combinations of any number of
these formatting options may require a higher number of image bands.
To set the number of image bands, use PrintSet or the Number of Image
Bands, Set (<SI>I) IPL command. For help, see the PrintSet online help or
the “Number of Image Bands, Set” on page 115.

Optimizing Print Speed and Image Band Setting

The minimum number of image bands available is two. The maximum
number of image bands varies between printer models. Use PrintSet to
check for the maximum number of image bands available, or see the
“Number of Image Bands, Set” on page 115.
To optimize the number of image bands for your print speed
1 Set the image band setting at the lowest number (2).
2 Print a label at the desired speed.
If the label prints, the image band setting is optimal. You do not need to
perform any more adjustments.
If the number of image bands is too low, the printer aborts the label
before printing is completed and attempts to reprint the label at the
slowest speed (2 ips) with the highest number of image bands. Continue
with Step 3.
3 Return to the original print speed and increase the original number of
image bands one at a time.
Continue to increase the number of image bands until the printer prints
a label correctly.
If the printer still aborts and reprints at the highest image band setting, you
may be trying to optimize at a print speed that is too high for your label
format. Try optimizing the number of image bands at a lower print speed,
or add expansion RAM.
To print very complex labels at high speeds, you must allocate enough
image bands to completely image the label before printing. By allocating
one band for each 2.54 cm (1 in) of label length, you can print at any
speed; however, you may notice considerable delays before each label is
printed.

Image Band Example

This example shows how the printer prints a label format using image
bands. The label is 12.7 cm (5 in) long and is divided into five image
bands. The printer is configured for three image bands, which means that
three bands will be imaged before printing begins.

50 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

IPL.012

The dashed lines represent the divisions between the five image bands, and the arrow
() represents the portion of the image band that is being printed at that time.

IPL.013

First Image Band: This diagram shows the first 2.54 cm (1 in) of the label imaged into
the first image band. The other two image bands are still empty. Printing is not started.

IPL.014

Second Image Band: This diagram shows the second 2.54 cm (1 in) section of the label
imaged into the second image band. Printing still is not started.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 51

Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

IPL.015

Third Image Band: This diagram shows the third 2.54 cm (1 in) section of the label
imaged into the third image band. Printing begins from the first image band, as
indicated by the arrow. At this point, all three available image bands have been filled.
The first band will be reused after it has been completely printed.

IPL.016

Fourth Image Band: When the first image band is emptied (printed), the fourth band is
imaged into it. Printing continues from the second image band. As before, this band
must be emptied before the final band can be imaged into it.

IPL.017

Fifth Image Band: The final section of the label is imaged into the second image band.
Printing continues from the third band. At this point, the label has been completely
imaged, but not printed.

52 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

Imaging of a second label could begin in the third image band while the
first label is still printing. The second label could begin printing
immediately after the first with no delay, which suggests that the only print
delay encountered would be during the time when the first bands of the
first label were imaged.
As labels become more complex, the influence that print speed and the
number of buffers has on throughput is limited by imaging speed. You will
encounter new considerations, such as delay between printing and
perceived printer performance. Unfortunately, no formula exists to
calculate an ideal configuration; instead, you will have to find it through
trial and error.

Reimaging Modified Fields

You can now choose to reimage only the fields in a label format that you
modify instead of reimaging the entire label format. If you are updating
data in only a few simple fields, it might be faster to use the modified field
reimaging command; however, you need to take into account the type of
fields you will be reimaging. If you choose to reimage a field that takes
longer to erase and reimage than it takes an entire label format to erase and
reimage, you will not be increasing throughput. Erasing a field requires
reimaging it with zeros and erasing a label requires only clearing the RAM.
When you use it correctly, this command parameter can greatly increase the
throughput of your printer.
To use the modified field reimaging command
1 Make sure that you select enough image bands to allow the printer to
retain the entire label image.
One image band is equal to 2.54 cm (1 in) of label length.
2 Select the fields to reimage by using the following command:
<ESC>En,m
See “Format, Select” on page 94 for more information about reimaging
modified fields.

Optimizing Image Bands for Batch Printing

If you frequently print batches of identical labels (using the <US>
command) or print a quantity of identical labels, you may want to optimize
the number of image bands for batch printing. Optimizing the number of
image bands for batch printing is especially helpful if you experience delays
between the printing of each label.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 53

Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

To optimize the number of image bands for batch printing, you must select
enough image memory to allow the printer to retain the entire label image.
To optimize batch printing, select the number of image bands (1 band =
2.54 cm (1 in)) to equal the label size. For example, if the printed image
stops at a distance of 10.16 cm (4 in) from the beginning of the label, you
must select four image bands to prevent reimaging if the label is 12.7 cm (5
in) long.
The 3400C, 3400e, 3440, 4420, 4440, 7421, and PC41 printers
automatically select the optimal number of image bands. If you increase the
number of image bands on these printers, you may decrease performance.

Using Emulation Mode

Note: The 4630 and 4830 printers do not support Emulation mode.

Emulation mode lets you print bar code labels that were designed on an
86XX printer in multiples of 10 or 15 mil. (“Emulation mode” is also called
“86XX Emulation mode” in some printer manuals.)
Here is a summary of the features in Emulation mode:
• Pages are not available.
• Character size is specified by height and width magnification only.
• International characters are preceded by <SUB> or selectable by
language.
• The bitmaps for user-defined characters (UDC) and user-defined fonts
(UDF) are one bit per byte (instead of six bits per byte).
• Print resolution is in 10 mil dots.
• RFID commands are not available.
Two IPL commands place the printer in Emulation mode:
• Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up.
• Emulation Mode, Enter.
The following table lists all the IPL commands that work when the printer
is in Emulation mode.

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode

IPL Command Name Syntax Page
12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit U 157
Abort Print Job <EM> 82
Advanced Mode, Select <ESC>C 86
Alphanumeric Field Separator <GS> 86

54 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name Syntax Page
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable <ESC>j 105
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable <ESC>d 105
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable <ESC>e 105
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable <ESC>k 106
Bar Code, Select Type c 126
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit B 127
Batch Count, Set <US> 87
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define y 127
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define x 128
Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define T 129
Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define b 129
Box Field, Create or Edit W 130
Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define X 131
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define r 131
Clear All Data <CAN> 87
Clear Data From Current Field <DEL> 87
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define p 133
Command Tables, Load C 133
Command Terminator ; 158
Command Terminator 1 <NUL> 88
Command Terminator 2 <LF> 88
Communication Port Configuration, Set <SI>P 106
Configuration Parameters, Transmit <ESC>p 88
Control Panel Access Permission, Set <SI>A 107
Current Edit Session, Save N 134
Cut <SO> 88
Cutter, Enable or Disable <SI>c 107
Dark Adjust K 158
Dark Adjust, Set <SI>d 108
Data Shift - International Characters <SUB> 88
Data Source for Format in a Page, Define e 134
Direct Graphics Mode, Select <ESC>g 90
Emulation Mode, Enter <ESC>c 90
Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up <SI>C 108
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set <SI>D 109
Error Code, Request <BEL> 82
Factory Defaults, Reset D 158
Field, Delete D 134
Field, Select <ESC>F 91
Field Data, Define Source d 134
Field Decrement, Set <ESC>D 92
Field Direction, Define f 136

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 55

Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name Syntax Page
Field Increment, Set <ESC>I 92
Field Origin, Define o 136
First Data Entry Field, Select <ACK> 92
Font, Transmit <ESC>v 93
Font Character Width, Define Z 137
Font Type, Select c 137
Form Feed <FF> 94
Format, Create or Edit A or F 139
Format, Erase E 140
Format, Select <ESC>E 94
Format, Transmit <ESC>x 95
Format Direction in a Page, Define q 140
Format Offset Within a Page, Define O 141
Format Position From Page, Delete m 141
Format Position in a Page, Assign M 141
Formats, Print f 158
Graphic, Select c 142
Graphic or UDC, Define u 142
Hardware Configuration Label, Print h 158
Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define h 143
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit H 144
IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable <SI>I 110
Increment and Decrement, Disable <ESC>N 96
Intercharacter Delay, Set <SYN> 111
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define z 145
Interpretive Field, Edit I 145
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable I 145
Label and Gap Length, Transmit <ESC> L 82
Label Rest Point, Adjust <SI>f 111
Label Retract, Enable or Disable <SI>R 111
Label Retract Distance, Set <SI>r 112
Label Stock Type, Select <SI>T 112
Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit T 159
Length of Line or Box Field, Define l 146
Line Field, Create or Edit L 146
Maximum Label Length, Set <SI>L 113
Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set <SI>e 113
Media Sensitivity, Select <SI>g 114
Memory Usage, Transmit <ESC>m 96
Message Delay, Set <ESC><SYN> 115
Next Data Entry Field, Select <CR> 97
Number of Image Bands, Set <SI>I 115

56 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name Syntax Page
Numeric Field Separator <FS> 97
Options Selected, Transmit <ESC>O 98
Outline Font, Clear or Create J 146
Outline Font, Download j 147
Page, Create or Edit S 148
Page, Delete s 149
Page, Select <ESC>G 99
Page, Transmit <ESC>y 99
Pages, Print p 159
Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set <SI>p 116
Pitch Label, Print C 159
Pitch Size, Set g 149
Point Size, Set k 149
Postamble, Set <EOT> 117
Preamble, Set <SOH> 117
Print <ETB> 99
Print Quality Label, Print Q 159
Print Speed, Set <SI>S 117
Printer Language, Select <SI>l 118
Printhead Loading Mode, Select <SI>h 120
Printhead Parameters, Transmit <ESC>H 100
Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit P 159
Program Mode, Enter <ESC>P 100
Program Mode, Exit R 150
Program Number, Transmit <ESC>M 100
Quantity Count, Set <RS> 100
Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit M 160
Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit <ESC>Q 82
Reset <DLE> 83
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable <SI>t 123
Slash Zero, Enable or Disable <SI>z 124
Software Configuration Label, Print s 160
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print <ESC><SP> 102
Status Dump <VT> 83
Status Enquiry <ENQ> 84
Takeup Motor Torque, Increase <SI>b 124
Test and Service Mode, Enter <ESC>T 102
Test and Service Mode, Exit R 160
Top of Form, Set <SI>F 125
Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit G 160
User-Defined Character (UDC) and Graphics, Print g 160
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create G 155

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 57

Chapter 5 — Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name Syntax Page
User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit U 155
User-Defined Characters, Transmit <ESC>u 102
User-Defined Font Character, Create t 156
User-Defined Fonts, Print t 160
User-Defined Tables, Transmit <ESC>Z 103
Warm Boot <BS> 103
Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define w 156

58 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 6 Finding IPL Commands in This
Manual

This chapter contains tables that show the page numbers in Chapter 7
where each IPL command is described. The tables are organized in various
ways to help you find the command you are looking for.

Table Page How the Table is Organized

Commands Listed by Name 60 Alphabetized by the command name
Commands Listed by Syntax 64 Alphabetized by the command syntax
Commands Listed by Task 68 Divided into groups, further divided into the
tasks you will perform, and finally
alphabetized by the command name.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 59

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name

This table lists the IPL commands, syntax, and page numbers in
alphabetical order by command name.

Commands Listed by Name

IPL Command Syntax Page
12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit U 157
Abort Print Job <EM> 82
Advanced Mode, Select <ESC>C 86
Alphanumeric Field Separator <GS> 86
Ambient Temperature, Transmit A 158
Amount of Storage, Define <SI>N 104
Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable <SI>a 105
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable <ESC>j 105
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable <ESC>d 105
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable <ESC>e 105
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable <ESC>k 106
Bar Code, Select Type c 126
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit B 127
Batch Count, Set <US> 87
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define y 127
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define x 128
Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define T 129
Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define b 129
Box Field, Create or Edit W 130
Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define X 131
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define r 131
Clear All Data <CAN> 87
Clear Data From Current Field <DEL> 87
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define p 133
Command Tables, Load C 133
Command Terminator ; 158
Command Terminator 1 <NUL> 88
Command Terminator 2 <LF> 88
Communication Port Configuration, Set <SI>P 106
Configuration Parameters, Transmit <ESC>p 88
Control Panel Access Permission, Set <SI>A 107
Current Edit Session, Save N 134
Cut <SO> 88
Cutter, Enable or Disable <SI>c 107
Dark Adjust K 158
Dark Adjust, Set <SI>d 108
Data Shift - International Characters <SUB> 88
Data Source for Format in a Page, Define e 134

60 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name (continued)

IPL Command Syntax Page
Direct Graphics Mode, Select <ESC>g 90
Direct Graphics Emulation Mode, Enable or Disable <SI>o 108
Emulation Mode, Enter <ESC>c 90
Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up <SI>C 108
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set <SI>D 109
Error Code, Request <BEL> 82
Factory Defaults, Reset D 158
Field, Delete D 134
Field, Select <ESC>F 91
Field Data, Define Source d 134
Field Decrement, Set <ESC>D 92
Field Direction, Define f 136
Field Increment, Set <ESC>I 92
Field Origin, Define o 136
First Data Entry Field, Select <ACK> 92
Font, Transmit <ESC>v 93
Font Character Width, Define Z 137
Font Type, Select c 137
Form Feed <FF> 94
Format, Create or Edit A or F 139
Format, Erase E 140
Format, Select <ESC>E 94
Format, Transmit <ESC>x 95
Format Direction in a Page, Define q 140
Format Offset Within a Page, Define O 141
Format Position From Page, Delete m 141
Format Position in a Page, Assign M 141
Formats, Print f 158
Graphic, Select c 142
Graphic or UDC, Define u 142
Hardware Configuration Label, Print h 158
Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define h 143
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit H 144
IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable <SI>i 110
Increment and Decrement, Disable <ESC>N 96
Intercharacter Delay, Set <SYN> 111
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define z 145
Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable <SI>s 111
Interpretive Field, Edit I 145
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable i 145
Label and Gap Length, Transmit <ESC> L 82
Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit L 158

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 61

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name (continued)

IPL Command Syntax Page
Label Rest Point, Adjust <SI>f 111
Label Retract, Enable or Disable <SI>R 111
Label Retract Distance, Set <SI>r 112
Label Stock Type, Select <SI>T 112
Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit T 159
Label Width, Set <SI>W 112
Length of Line or Box Field, Define l 146
Line Field, Create or Edit L 146
Maximum Label Length, Set <SI>L 113
Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set <SI>e 113
Media Sensitivity, Select <SI>g 114
Memory Usage, Transmit <ESC>m 96
Message Delay, Set <ESC><SYN> 115
Next Data Entry Field, Select <CR> 97
Number of Image Bands, Set <SI>I 115
Numeric Field Separator <FS> 97
Online or Offline on Power-Up <SI>O 116
Options Selected, Transmit <ESC>O 98
Outline Font, Clear or Create J 146
Outline Font, Download j 147
Page, Create or Edit S 148
Page, Delete s 149
Page, Select <ESC>G 99
Page, Transmit <ESC>y 99
Pages, Print p 159
Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set <SI>p 116
Pitch Label, Print C 159
Pitch Size, Set g 149
Point Size, Set k 149
Postamble, Set <EOT> 117
Preamble, Set <SOH> 117
Print <ETB> 99
Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set v 150
Print Quality Label, Print Q 159
Print Speed, Set <SI>S 117
Printer Language, Select <SI>l 118
Printhead Loading Mode, Select <SI>h 120
Printhead Parameters, Transmit <ESC>H 100
Printhead Pressure, Set <SI>H 121
Printhead Resistance Test, Begin B 159
Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit S 159
Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit P 159

62 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name (continued)

IPL Command Syntax Page
Printhead Test Parameters, Set <SI>U 121
Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit V 160
Program Mode, Enter <ESC>P 100
Program Mode, Exit R 150
Program Number, Transmit <ESC>M 100
Quantity Count, Set <RS> 100
Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit M 160
Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit <ESC>Q 82
Reset <DLE> 83
RFID Parameters, Set <SI>J 121
RFID Tag, Read <ESC>J 101
RFID Tag Field Setup a 150
RFID Tag Protect n 155
RFID Tag Void Text, Set <SI>K 122
RFID Tag Write Field, Create or Edit Q 155
Ribbon Save Zones, Set <SI>Z 123
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable <SI>t 123
Slash Zero, Enable or Disable <SI>z 124
Software Configuration Label, Print s 160
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print <ESC><SP> 102
Status Dump <VT> 83
Status Enquiry <ENQ> 84
Takeup Motor Torque, Increase <SI>b 124
Test and Service Mode, Enter <ESC>T 102
Test and Service Mode, Exit R 160
Top of Form, Set <SI>F 125
Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit G 160
User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print g 160
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create G 155
User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit U 155
User-Defined Characters, Transmit <ESC>u 102
User-Defined Font Character, Create t 156
User-Defined Fonts, Print t 160
User-Defined Tables, Transmit <ESC>Z 103
Warm Boot <BS> 103
Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define w 156

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 63

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax

This table lists the IPL commands and their page numbers in alphabetical
order by command syntax.

Commands Listed by Syntax

Syntax IPL Command Page
; Command Terminator 158
<ACK> First Data Entry Field, Select 92
<BEL> Error Code, Request 82
<BS> Warm Boot 103
<CAN> Clear All Data 87
<CR> Next Data Entry Field, Select 97
<DEL> Clear Data From Current Field 87
<DLE> Reset 83
<EM> Abort Print Job 82
<ENQ> Status Enquiry 84
<EOT> Postamble, Set 117
<ESC><SP> Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print 102
<ESC><SYN> Message Delay, Set 115
<ESC>c Emulation Mode, Enter 90
<ESC>C Advanced Mode, Select 86
<ESC>d Auto-Transmit 2, Enable 105
<ESC>D Field Decrement, Set 92
<ESC>e Auto-Transmit 3, Enable 105
<ESC>E Format, Select 94
<ESC>F Field, Select 91
<ESC>g Direct Graphics Mode, Select 90
<ESC>G Page, Select 99
<ESC>H Printhead Parameters, Transmit 100
<ESC>I Field Increment, Set 92
<ESC>j Auto-Transmit 1, Enable 105
<ESC>J RFID Tag, Read 101
<ESC>k Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable 106
<ESC>L Label and Gap Length, Transmit 82
<ESC>m Memory Usage, Transmit 96
<ESC>M Program Number, Transmit 100
<ESC>N Increment and Decrement, Disable 96
<ESC>O Options Selected, Transmit 98
<ESC>p Configuration Parameters, Transmit 88
<ESC>P Program Mode, Enter 100
<ESC>Q Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit 82
<ESC>T Test and Service Mode, Enter 102
<ESC>u User-Defined Characters, Transmit 102
<ESC>v Font, Transmit 93

64 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax (continued)

Syntax IPL Command Page
<ESC>x Format, Transmit 95
<ESC>y Page, Transmit 99
<ESC>Z User-Defined Tables, Transmit 103
<ETB> Print 99
<FF> Form Feed 94
<FS> Numeric Field Separator 97
<GS> Alphanumeric Field Separator 86
<LF> Command Terminator 2 88
<NUL> Command Terminator 1 88
<RS> Quantity Count, Set 100
<SI>a Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable 105
<SI>A Control Panel Access Permission, Set 107
<SI>b Takeup Motor Torque, Increase 124
<SI>c Cutter, Enable or Disable 107
<SI>C Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up 108
<SI>d Dark Adjust, Set 108
<SI>D End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set 109
<SI>e Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set 113
<SI>f Label Rest Point, Adjust 111
<SI>F Top of Form, Set 125
<SI>g Media Sensitivity, Select 114
<SI>h Printhead Loading Mode, Select 120
<SI>H Printhead Pressure, Set 121
<SI>i IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable 110
<SI>I Number of Image Bands, Set 115
<SI>J RFID Parameters, Set 121
<SI>K RFID Tag Void Text, Set 122
<SI>l Printer Language, Select 118
<SI>L Maximum Label Length, Set 113
<SI>N Amount of Storage, Define 104
<SI>o Direct Graphics Emulation Mode, Enable or Disable 108
<SI>O Online or Offline on Power-Up 116
<SI>p Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set 116
<SI>P Communication Port Configuration, Set 106
<SI>r Label Retract Distance, Set 112
<SI>R Label Retract, Enable or Disable 111
<SI>s Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable 111
<SI>S Print Speed, Set 117
<SI>t Self-Strip, Enable or Disable 123
<SI>T Label Stock Type, Select 112

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 65

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax (continued)

Syntax IPL Command Page
<SI>U Printhead Test Parameters, Set 121
<SI>W Label Width, Set 112
<SI>z Slash Zero, Enable or Disable 124
<SI>Z Ribbon Save Zones, Set 123
<SO> Cut 88
<SOH> Preamble, Set 117
<SUB> Data Shift - International Characters 88
<SYN> Intercharacter Delay, Set 111
<US> Batch Count, Set 87
<VT> Status Dump 83
a RFID Tag Field Setup 150
A Ambient Temperature, Transmit 158
A or F Format, Create or Edit 139
b Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define 129
B Bar Code Field, Create or Edit 127
B Printhead Resistance Test, Begin 159
c Bar Code, Select Type 126
c Font Type, Select 137
c Graphic, Select 142
C Command Tables, Load 133
C Pitch Label, Print 159
d Field Data, Define Source 134
D Factory Defaults, Reset 158
D Field, Delete 134
e Data Source for Format in a Page, Define 134
E Format, Erase 140
f Field Direction, Define 136
f Formats, Print 158
g Pitch Size, Set 149
g User-Defined Characters and Graphics, Print 160
G Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit 160
G User-Defined Character, Clear or Create 155
h Hardware Configuration Label, Print 158
h Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define 143
H Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit 144
i Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable 145
I Interpretive Field, Edit 145
j Outline Font, Download 147
J Outline Font, Clear or Create 146
k Point Size, Set 149
K Dark Adjust 158
l Length of Line or Box Field, Define 146

66 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax (continued)

Syntax IPL Command Page
L Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit 158
L Line Field, Create or Edit 146
m Format Position From Page, Delete 141
M Format Position in a Page, Assign 141
M Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit 160
N Current Edit Session, Save 134
n RFID Tag Protect 155
o Field Origin, Define 136
O Format Offset Within a Page, Define 141
p Code 39 Prefix Character, Define 133
p Pages, Print 159
P Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit 159
q Format Direction in a Page, Define 140
Q Print Quality Label, Print 159
Q RFID Tag Write Field, Create or Edit 155
r Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define 131
R Program Mode, Exit 150
R Test and Service Mode, Exit 160
S Page, Create or Edit 148
s Page, Delete 149
s Software Configuration Label, Print 160
S Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit 159
t User-Defined Font Character, Create 156
t User-Defined Fonts, Print 160
T Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define 129
T Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit 159
u Graphic or UDC, Define 142
U 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit 157
U User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit 155
v Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set 150
V Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit 160
w Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define 156
W Box Field, Create or Edit 130
x Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define 128
X Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define 131
y Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define 127
z Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define 145
Z Font Character Width, Define 137

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 67

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Task

This section focuses on the tasks that you perform with IPL commands,
such as editing bar code fields on a label. Each table presents a task and lists
the IPL commands that you must use to perform that task. For example, to
edit bar code fields while the printer is in Program mode, you must use all
the commands shown in the second table in this section.

Note: This section does not list all the IPL commands, only the commands
that are necessary to perform specific tasks. For a complete list of
commands, see the table of contents, “Commands Listed by Name” starting
on page “Commands Listed by Name” on page 60 or “Commands Listed
by Syntax” on page “Commands Listed by Syntax” on page 64.
Some command names in this section have been modified slightly to
indicate exactly how you will use the command to perform the task.

Immediate Commands
System Commands
Syntax Command Page
<BEL> Error Code, Request 82
<DLE> Reset 83
<EM> Abort Print Job 82
<ENQ> Status Enquiry 84
<VT> Status Dump 83
<ESC>L Label and Gap Length, Transmit 82
<ESC>Q Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit 82

Program Mode Commands

Bar Code Field Editing Commands
Syntax Command Page
c Bar Code, Select Type 126
d Field Data, Define Source 134
f Field Direction, Define 136
h Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define 143
I Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable 145
o Field Origin, Define 136
p Code 39 Prefix Character, Define 133
r Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define 131
w Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define 156

68 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Bitmap User-Defined Font Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
t User-Defined Font Character, Create 156
u Graphic or UDC, Define 142
X Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define 131
x Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define 128
y Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define 127
Z Font Character Width, Define 137
z Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define 145

Box Field Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
f Field Direction, Define 136
h Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define 143
l Length of Line or Box Field, Define 146
o Field Origin, Define 136
w Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define 156

Format Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
B Bar Code Field, Create or Edit 127
D Field, Delete 134
H Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit 144
I Interpretive Field, Edit 145
L Line Field, Create or Edit 146
Q RFID Tag Write Field, Create or Edit 155
U User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit 155
W Box Field, Create or Edit 130

Human-Readable Field Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
b Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define 129
c Font Type, Select 137
d Field Data, Define Source 134
f Field Direction, Define 136
g Pitch Size, Set 149
h Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define 143
k Point Size, Set 149
o Field Origin, Define 136
r Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define 131
w Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define 156

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 69

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Interpretive Field Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
b Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define 129
c Font Type, Select 137
f Field Direction, Define 136
g Pitch Size, Set 149
h Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define 143
k Point Size, Set 149
o Field Origin, Define 136
r Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define 131
w Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define 156

Line Field Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
F Field Direction, Define 136
l Length of Line or Box Field, Define 146
o Field Origin, Define 136
w Width of Line, Box, Bar or Character, Define 156

Page Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
e Data Source for Format in a Page, Define 134
M Format Position in a Page, Assign 141
m Format Position From Page, Delete 141
O Format Offset Within a Page, Define 141
q Format Direction in a Page, Define 140

Programming Commands
Syntax Command Page
A Format, Create or Edit 139
E Format, Erase 140
F Format, Create or Edit 139
G User-Defined Character, Clear or Create 155
J Outline Font, Clear or Create 146
N Current Edit Session, Save 134
R Program Mode, Exit 150
S Page, Create or Edit 148
s Page, Delete 149
T Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define 129

70 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

RFID Tag Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
a RFID Tag Field Setup 150
d Field Data, Define Source 134
n RFID Tag Protect 155

UDC Field Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
c Graphic, Select 142
f Field Direction, Define 136
h Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define 143
o Field Origin, Define 136
w Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define 156

UDC Editing Commands

Syntax Command Page
u Graphic or UDC, Define 142
x Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define 128
y Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define 127
j Outline Font, Download 147
J Outline Font, Clear or Create 146

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 71

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Print Mode Commands

Configuration Commands
Syntax Command Page
<SI>a Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable 105
<SI>A Control Panel Access Permission, Set 107
<SI>b Takeup Motor Torque, Increase 124
<SI>c Cutter, Enable or Disable 107
<SI>C Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up 108
<SI>d Dark Adjust, Set 108
<SI>D End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set 109
<SI>e Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set 113
<SI>f Label Rest Point, Adjust 111
<SI>F Top of Form, Set 125
<SI>g Media Sensitivity, Select 114
<SI>h Printhead Loading Mode, Select 120
<SI>H Printhead Pressure, Set 121
<SI>i IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable 110
<SI>I Number of Image Bands, Set 115
<SI>l Printer Language, Select 118
<SI>J RFID Parameters, Set 121
<SI>K RFID Tag Void Text, Set 122
<SI>L Maximum Label Length, Set 113
<SI>N Amount of Storage, Define 104
<SI>o Direct Graphics Emulation Mode, Enable or Disable 108
<SI>O Online or Offline on Power-Up 116
<SI>p Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set 116
<SI>r Label Retract Distance, Set 112
<SI>R Label Retract, Enable or Disable 111
<SI>s Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable 111
<SI>S Print Speed, Set 117
<SI>t Self-Strip, Enable or Disable 123
<SI>T Label Stock Type, Select 112
<SI>U Printhead Test Parameters, Set 121
<SI>W Label Width, Set 112
<SI>z Slash Zero, Enable or Disable 124
<SI>Z Ribbon Save Zones, Set 123

72 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Print Commands
Syntax Command Page
<ACK> First Data Entry Field, Select 92
<BS> Warm Boot 103
<CAN> Clear All Data 87
<CR> Next Data Entry Field, Select 97
<DEL> Clear Data From Current Field 87
<ESC>c Emulation Mode, Select 90
<ESC>C Advanced Mode, Select 86
<ESC>D Field Decrement, Set 92
<ESC>E Format, Select 94
<ESC>F Field, Select 91
<ESC>g Direct Graphics Mode, Select 90
<ESC>G Page, Select 99
<ESC>H Printhead Parameters, Transmit 100
<ESC>I Field Increment, Set 92
<ESC>J RFID Tag, Read 101
<ESC>m Memory Usage, Transmit 96
<ESC>M Program Number, Transmit 100
<ESC>N Increment and Decrement, Disable 96
<ESC>O Options Selected, Transmit 98
<ESC>p Configuration Parameters, Transmit 88
<ESC>P Program Mode, Enter 100
<ESC><SP> Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print 102
<ESC>T Test and Service Mode, Enter 102
<ESC>u User-Defined Characters, Transmit 102
<ESC>v Font, Transmit 93
<ESC>x Format, Transmit 95
<ESC>y Page, Transmit 99
<ESC>Z User-Defined Tables, Transmit 103
<ETB> Print 99
<FF> Form Feed 94
<FS> Numeric Field Separator 97
<GS> Alphanumeric Field Separator 86
<LF> Command Terminator 2 88
<NUL> Command Terminator 1 88
<RS> Quantity Count, Set 100
<SO> Cut 88
<SUB> Data Shift - International Characters 88
<US> Batch Count, Set 87

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 73

Chapter 6 — Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Protocol Modification Commands

Syntax Command Page
<EOT> Postamble, Set 117
<ESC>d Auto-Transmit 2, Enable 105
<ESC>e Auto-Transmit 3, Enable 105
<ESC>j Auto-Transmit 1, Enable 105
<ESC>k Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable 106
<SI>p Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set 116
<SI>P Communication Port Configuration, Set 106
<ESC><SYN> Message Delay, Set 115
<SOH> Preamble, Set 117
<SYN> Intercharacter Delay, Set 111

Test and Service Commands

Syntax Command Page
; Command Terminator 158
A Ambient Temperature, Transmit 158
B Printhead Resistance Test, Begin 159
C Pitch Label, Print 159
D Factory Defaults, Reset 158
f Formats, Print 158
g User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print 160
G Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit 160
h Hardware Configuration Label, Print 158
K Dark Adjust 158
L Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit 158
M Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit 160
p Pages, Print 159
P Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit 159
Q Print Quality Label, Print 159
R Test and Service Mode, Exit 160
s Software Configuration Label, Print 160
S Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit 159
t User-Defined Fonts, Print 160
T Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit 159
U 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit 157
V Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit 160

74 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 7 IPL Command Reference

This chapter describes all of the IPL commands. The commands are
grouped by type (Immediate, Print, Configuration, Program, and Test and
Service) and alphabetized within each type.
The commands listed in this chapter are used for all Intermec printers.
Each command explains syntax, defaults, ranges of values for the variables,
and special notes for specific printers.
Convention Description
<> Angle brackets < > enclose mnemonic representations of ASCII control
characters. For example, <ETX> represents the ASCII “End of Text”
control character.
data Italic text represents variable data, which you must replace with a real
value. For example, n signifies a variable for which you must designate a
constant value.
[data] Italic text within brackets represents optional data.
Ctrl Bold text represents a key on your keypad. For example, Ctrl represents
the Ctrl key.
Ctrl-Z When two keys are joined with a dash, press them simultaneously. For
example, if you see the command Ctrl-Z, press the two keys at the same
time.
E3;F3 Type all characters that appear in the Courier font by pressing an
individual key on the keypad.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 75

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Which Commands Does Your Printer Support?

The next table shows which commands are supported by each printer. A •
indicates that the printer supports the command, and a blank space
indicates that the printer ignores the command.

Commands Supported By Each Printer

EasyCoder
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 7 P F4, PD41,
2 4 4 4 6 1 4 4 X 4 C PF2i,
4 0 0 4 0 0 0 X 3 2 4 PF4i, PM4i,
IPL Command Page 0 0 0e 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 PX4i, PX6i
12 Volt Supply Value, 157 •
Transmit
Abort Print Job 82 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Advanced Mode, Select 86 • • • • • • • • • • •
Alphanumeric Field Separator 86 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Ambient Temperature, 158 •
Transmit
Amount of Storage, Define 104 • • • • • •
Audible Alarm, Enable or 105 • • (i only)
Disable
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable 105 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable 105 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable 105 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, 106 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Disable
Bar Code, Select Type 126 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Bar Code Field, Create or 127 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Edit
Batch Count, Set 87 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Bitmap Cell Height for 127 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Graphic or UDF, Define
Bitmap Cell Width for 128 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Graphic or UDF, Define
Bitmap User-Defined Font, 129 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Clear or Define
Border Around Human- 129 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Readable Text, Define
Box Field, Create or Edit 130 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Character Bitmap Origin 131 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Offset, Define
Character Rotation or Bar 131 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Code Ratio, Define
Clear All Data 87 • • • • • • • • • • • •

76 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

EasyCoder
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 7 P F4, PD41,
2 4 4 4 6 1 4 4 X 4 C PF2i,
4 0 0 4 0 0 0 X 3 2 4 PF4i, PM4i,
IPL Command Page 0 0 0e 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 PX4i, PX6i
Clear Data From Current 87 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field
Code 39 Prefix Character, 133 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Define
Command Tables, Load 133 • • • • • • • • • • •
Command Terminator 158 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Command Terminator 1 88 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Command Terminator 2 88 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Communication Port 106 • • •
Configuration, Set
Configuration Parameters, 88 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmit
Control Panel Access 107 • • • (i only)
Permission, Set
Current Edit Session, Save 134 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cut 88 • • • • • • • • •
(C, D)
Cutter, Enable or Disable 107 • • • • • • • • •
Dark Adjust 158 •
Dark Adjust, Set 108 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Data Shift – International 88 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Characters
Data Source for Format in a 134 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Page, Define
Direct Graphics Mode, Select 90 • • • • • • •
(C, D)
Direct Graphics Emulation 108 •
Mode, Enable or Disable
Emulation Mode, Enter 90 • • • • • • • • • • •
Emulation or Advanced 108 • • • • • • • • • • •
Mode on Power-Up
End-of-Print Skip Distance, 109 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Set
Error Code, Request 82 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Factory Defaults, Reset 158 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field, Delete 134 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field, Select 91 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field Data, Define Source 134 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field Decrement, Set 92 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field Direction, Define 136 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field Increment, Set 92 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field Origin, Define 136 • • • • • • • • • • • •

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 77

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

EasyCoder
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 7 P F4, PD41,
2 4 4 4 6 1 4 4 X 4 C PF2i,
4 0 0 4 0 0 0 X 3 2 4 PF4i, PM4i,
IPL Command Page 0 0 0e 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 PX4i, PX6i
First Data Entry Field, Select 92 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Font, Transmit 93 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Font Character Width, 137 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Define
Font Type, Select 137 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Form Feed 94 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Format, Create or Edit 139 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Format Direction in a Page, 140 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Define
Format, Erase 140 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Format, Select 94 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Format, Transmit 95 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Format Offset Within a Page, 141 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Define
Format Position From Page, 141 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Delete
Format Position in a Page, 141 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Assign
Formats, Print 158 • • • • • • •
(C, D)
Graphic, Select 142 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Graphic or UDC, Define 142 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Hardware Configuration 158 • • • • • • •
Label, Print (C, D)
Height Magnification of Bar, 143 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Box, or UDC, Define
Human-Readable Field, 144 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Create or Edit
IBM Language Translation, 110 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Enable or Disable
Increment and Decrement, 96 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Disable
Intercharacter Delay, Set 111 • • • • • • • • • • •
Intercharacter Space for UDF, 145 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Define
Interlabel Ribbon Save, 111 •
Enable or Disable
Interpretive Field, Edit 145 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Interpretive Field, Enable or 145 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Disable
Label and Gap Length, 82 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmit
Label Path Open Sensor 158 • • • • • • • • •
Value, Transmit

78 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

EasyCoder
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 7 P F4, PD41,
2 4 4 4 6 1 4 4 X 4 C PF2i,
4 0 0 4 0 0 0 X 3 2 4 PF4i, PM4i,
IPL Command Page 0 0 0e 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 PX4i, PX6i
Label Rest Point, Adjust 111 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Label Retract, Enable or 111 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Disable
Label Retract Distance, Set 112 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Label Stock Type, Select 112 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Label Taken Sensor Value, 159 • • • (400 • • • • • • • • •
Transmit dpi
only)
Label Width, Set 112 • • • •
Length of Line or Box Field, 146 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Define
Line Field, Create or Edit 146 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Maximum Label Length, Set 113 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Media Fault Recovery Mode, 113 • • • • •
Set
Media Sensitivity, Select 114 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Memory Usage, Transmit 96 • • • • • • • • • •
Message Delay, Set 115 • • • • • • • • • • •
Next Data Entry Field, Select 97 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Number of Image Bands, Set 115 • • • • • • • • • •
Numeric Field Separator 97 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Online or Offline on Power- 116 • •
Up
Options Selected, Transmit 98 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Outline Font, Clear or Create 146 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Outline Font, Download 147 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Page, Create or Edit 148 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Page, Delete 149 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Page, Select 99 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Page, Transmit 99 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Pages, Print 159 • • • • • • •
(C, D)
Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set 116 • • • •
Pitch Label, Print 159 • • • • • • • • • •
Pitch Size, Set 149 • • • • • • • • • • •
Point Size, Set 149 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Postamble, Set 117 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Preamble, Set 117 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Print 99 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Print Line Dot Count Limit, 150
Set
Print Quality Label, Print 159 • • • • • • • • • • • •

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 79

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

EasyCoder
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 7 P F4, PD41,
2 4 4 4 6 1 4 4 X 4 C PF2i,
4 0 0 4 0 0 0 X 3 2 4 PF4i, PM4i,
IPL Command Page 0 0 0e 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 PX4i, PX6i
Print Speed, Set 117 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Printer Language, Select 118 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Printhead Loading Mode, 120 • • • • • • • •
Select (C, D)
Printhead Parameters, 100 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmit
Printhead Pressure, Set 121 •
Printhead Resistance Test, 159 •
Begin
Printhead Resistance Values, 159 •
Transmit
Printhead Temperature 220 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Sensor Value, Transmit
Printhead Test Parameters, 121 •
Set
Printhead Volt Supply Value, 160 •
Transmit
Program Mode, Enter 100 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Program Mode, Exit 150 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Program Number, Transmit 100 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Quantity Count, Set 100 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reflective Sensor Value, 160 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmit
Remaining Quantity and 82 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Batch Count, Transmit
Reset 83 • • • • • • • • • • • •
RFID Parameters, Set 121 • (PM4i)
RFID Tag, Read 101 • (PM4i)
RFID Tag Field Setup 150 • (PM4i)
RFID Tag Protect 155 • (PM4i)
RFID Tag Void Text, Set 122 • (PM4i)
RFID Tag Write Field, Create 155 • (PM4i)
or Edit
Ribbon Save Zones, Set 123 •
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable 123 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Slash Zero, Enable or Disable • • (e) •
Software Configuration 160 • • • • • • •
Label, Print (C, D)
Start and Stop Codes (Code 102 • • • • • • • • • • • •
39), Print
Status Dump 83 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Status Enquiry 84 • • • • • • • • • • • •

80 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

EasyCoder
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 7 P F4, PD41,
2 4 4 4 6 1 4 4 X 4 C PF2i,
4 0 0 4 0 0 0 X 3 2 4 PF4i, PM4i,
IPL Command Page 0 0 0e 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 PX4i, PX6i
Takeup Motor Torque, 124 •
Increase
Test and Service Mode, Enter 102 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Test and Service Mode, Exit 160 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Top of Form, Set 125 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmissive Sensor Value, 160 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmit
User-Defined Characters 160 • • • • • • •
(UDC) and Graphics, Print (C, D)
User-Defined Character, 155 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Clear or Create
User-Defined Character 155 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Field, Create or Edit
User-Defined Characters, 102 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmit
User-Defined Font Character, 156 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Create
User-Defined Fonts, Print 160 • • • • •
(C, D)
User-Defined Tables, 103 • • • • • • • • • • •
Transmit
Warm Boot 103 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Width of Line, Box, Bar, or 156 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Character, Define

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 81

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Immediate Commands
You can use Immediate commands to query the printer about the status of
the printer and any print jobs, to abort print jobs, to request error
conditions, and to reset the printer.
Unlike other commands that the printer stores in the data buffer and
executes in the order received, the printer executes immediate commands
when it receives them, regardless of printer mode.
For help downloading Immediate commands to the printer, see “Sending
IPL Commands to the Printer” on page 5.

Abort Print Job

Purpose: Stops batch printing.
Syntax: <EM>
Notes: The printer stops the current batch print job. The batch quantity count is
reset to the original setting. The printer continues to execute other
commands remaining in the buffer.

Error Code, Request

Purpose: Solicits error codes from the printer.
Syntax: <BEL>
Notes: The printer sends back the most recent error code as an ASCII number.
The error code represents a command syntax error or a printer RAM usage
error.
If no errors have occurred since the printer was turned on, the printer sends
a zero. It also resets the error code to 00.
See Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting,” for a list of error codes.

Label and Gap Length, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the label and gap length as measured by the number of 5 mil
increments.
Syntax: <ESC>L
Notes: Label length refers to the length of the label currently being processed. If
the label is longer than the distance between the label sensor and the
printhead, the printer transmits the length of the previous label.
If you select continuous stock, the printer transmits the length defined by
the Maximum Label Length, Set command (<SI>L).

Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit

Purpose: Uploads the remaining quantity and batch counts for the current print job.
Syntax: <ESC>Q

82 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Reset
Purpose: Executes a printer power-up reset immediately.
Syntax: <DLE>
Notes: The printer erases all data and commands in the input buffer upon reset. In
the following example, the first DLE is a transparency character. It instructs
the printer to use the <DLE> as a reset command.
<STX><DLE><DLE><ETX>

Status Dump
Purpose: Causes the printer to upload all current printer status.
Syntax: <VT>
Notes: The next table lists status messsages that are not uploaded by each printer.
Printer Status Messages Not Uploaded
3240 <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
3400 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
3400e <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
Only the 400 dpi version uploads <US> label path open.
3440 <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
3600 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
4100 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
4400 <BS> Takeup reel full
44X0 <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
4X30 <SO> Printhead test fail
7421, PC41 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
EasyCoder F4, PD41, <BS> Takeup reel full
PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, <SO> Printhead test fail
PX4i, PX6i

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 83

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Status Dump (Continued)

The printer uploads the status in the following order of priority for
Intermec Standard Protocol. See Appendix D for codes for other protocols.
<GS> Buffer already full <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail <SI> Printhead hot
<US> Label path open <FS> Label at strip pin
<US> Ribbon fault <ACK> RFID tag write okay
<EM> No label stock <DC1> Skipping
<DC3> Buffer now full <DC1> Printing
<EOT> RFID tag write error <DC1> Ready
<VT> RFID Tag read error

Status Enquiry
Purpose: Transmits the current printer status to the host.
Syntax: <ENQ>
Notes: The next table lists status messages that are not uploaded by each printer.
Printer Status Messages Not Uploaded
3240 <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
3400 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
3400e <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
Only the 400 dpi version uploads <US> Label path open.
3440 <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
3600 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
4100 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
4400 <BS> Takeup reel full
44X0 <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
4X30 <SO> Printhead test fail
7421, PC41 <US> Label path open
<BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail
EasyCoder F4, <BS> Takeup reel full
PD41, PF2i, PF4i, <SO> Printhead test fail
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

84 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Status Enquiry (Continued)

Notes: The printer uploads the status in the following order of priority for
Intermec Standard Protocol. See Appendix D for codes for other protocols.
<GS> Buffer already full <BS> Takeup reel full
<SO> Printhead test fail <SI> Printhead hot
<US> Label path open <FS> Label at strip pin
<US> Ribbon fault <ACK> RFID tag write okay
<EM> No label stock <DC1> Skipping
<DC3> Buffer now full <DC1> Printing
<EOT> RFID tag write error <DC1> Ready
<VT> RFID Tag read error

Print Commands
You can use print commands to pass data to formats and print labels. When
using print commands with printers with RFID modules, these commands
pass data to formats and print labels. Print mode is used for uploading
information from an RFID tag, for example, reading tag information.
When you enter data into a format for printing, the printer uses a field
pointer to designate the field in the format where the data should print. If
you choose a new format, the field pointer automatically points to the
lowest numbered data entry field and continues to point to that field until
you select a different field or format. If you select a field by using the <CR>
or <ESC>F command, new data entered into the field overwrites any data
already existing in the field.
Print commands are effective when the printer is in Print mode. You can
switch to Print mode with this command:
<STX>R<ETX>
For help downloading print commands to the printer, see “Sending IPL
Commands to the Printer” on page 5.
Note: You must precede each string of commands with the start of message
character <STX> and follow it with the end of message character <ETX>.
The next command in the message terminates all Print mode commands.
The command separator (<NUL> or <LF>) is optional between
commands, but is necessary to separate commands from data. For example,
to separate the <ESC>F command from data, type:
<ESC>F4<NUL>data

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 85

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Advanced Mode, Select

Purpose: Instructs the printer to operate in Advanced mode. Advanced mode is the
default mode; the alternative operating mode is Emulation mode.
Syntax: <ESC>Cn
where n specifies the dot size.
Advanced Mode, Select - Values Listed By Printer
Printer Default Values for n Notes
3240 n=1 0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size
1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size
3400e 200 dpi: Not 0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size The n parameter is
available 1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size not available on
400 dpi: n = 1 the 3400e with the
200 dpi option.
3440 n=1 0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size
1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size
44X0 4420: Not 0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size The n parameter is
available 1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size not available on
4440: n = 1 the 4420.

Notes: The field pointer designates the first field in format 0. Page 0 is the default
page.
You will lose all previously host-entered data when you switch operating
modes.

Alphanumeric Field Separator

Purpose: Increments or decrements alphanumeric characters within a field-separated
region. You must enclose the data between two sets of <GS> commands:
<GS>data<GS>
Syntax: <GS>
Alphanumeric characters are 0 to 9 and A to Z. The order of the characters
is 0, 1, 2...8, 9, A, B, C...Y, Z, 0, 1...9, A, B....
Notes: You may have more than one region in a field as long as they do not
overlap. Each region independently increments or decrements according to
the increment or decrement value specified for the field. The length of data
does not change. Rather, the values increment or decrement as in an
odometer. For example, 9 increments to 0, and Z increments to A.
This command marks the region of characters to increment or decrement,
but it does not actually increment or decrement. The printer ignores any
non-alphanumeric characters within this region.

86 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Alphanumeric Field Separator (Continued)

The following example illustrates the Alphanumeric Field Separator
command:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o175,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX>
<STX>H2;o75,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX>
<STX>H3;o200,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX>
<STX>H4;o100,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX>
<STX><CR><ESC>I1<GS>A<GS><ETX>
<STX><CR><ESC>D1<GS>C<GS><ETX>
<STX><CR>Increment Field<ETX>
<STX><CR>Decrement Field<ETX>
<STX><RS>3<ETB><ETX>

Batch Count, Set

Purpose: Sets the number of labels to be printed in the next batch.
Syntax: <US>n
where n is the number of labels. For all printers, the range for n is 1 to
1999. Default is 1.
Notes: This command causes the printer to make n copies of the same label. The
total number of labels printed per print command is equal to the quantity
in each batch multiplied by the number of batches.
The printer generates an error code (21) if n is out of range.
See your printer user’s manual for help optimizing image bands for batch
printing.

Clear All Data

Purpose: Clears all host-entered data from the current page or format.
Syntax: <CAN>
Notes: If you select a format, the pointer indicates the first data entry field in the
format after you clear the data. If you select a page, the pointer designates
the first data entry field in the first format.

Clear Data From Current Field

Purpose: Deletes data from the current field.
Syntax: <DEL>
Notes: The field pointer continues to designate the current field even after you
clear the data.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 87

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Command Terminator 1
Purpose: Terminates the current command.
Syntax: <NUL>

Command Terminator 2
Purpose: Terminates the current command.
Syntax: <LF>

Configuration Parameters, Transmit

Purpose: Uploads the current configuration commands from the printer.
Syntax: <ESC>p
Notes: The printer transmits only the configuration parameters that you can set
from the host.
Use this command to view, edit, or copy the current configuration
command settings.
See your printer user’s manual for a list of the configuration parameters that
the printer uploads to the host.

Cut
Purpose: Advances the label out to the cutter and cuts the label stock.
Syntax: <SO>
Notes: This command is executed only if the cutter is installed but not enabled.
Use this command only after you have printed a batch of labels.

Data Shift – International Characters

Purpose: Allows you to enter selected command characters as data.
Syntax: <SUB> or <DLE>
Notes: In Emulation mode, this command shifts the next character (if not a
control character) into the upper character bank (setting the eighth bit to 1)
to print international characters.
This command lets you enter selected command characters as data instead
of commands in both Advanced and Emulation mode. For example, use
this command to enter a <GS> or <CR> as data in a bar code or text field.

88 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Data Shift - International Characters (Continued)

Use <SUB> to send the following command characters as data:
<ACK> <DC4> <FF> <NUL> <SYN>
<BEL> <EM> <FS> <RS> <US>
<BS> <ENQ> <GS> <SI> <VT>
<CAN> <EOT> <HT> <SO>
<CR> <ESC> <LF> <SOH>
<DC2> <ETB> <NAK> <SUB>

Use <DLE> to send these command characters as data:

<DC1> <DC3> <STX> <ETX>

To send <DLE> as data, preface it with the command <SUB><DLE>.

This example illustrates using the Data Shift command to print control or
command characters in a data field.
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o750,10;f3;c0;h3;w2;b10;d0,50<ETX>
<STX>B1;o300,10;f3;c0;h200;w1;i1;r2<ETX>
<STX>B2;o600,10;f3;c0;h200;w1;i1;r2<ETX>
<STX>I1;o75,10;f3;c0;h3;w3<ETX>
<STX>I2;o375,10;f3;c0;h3;w3<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E1<ETX>
<STX><CAN><ETX>
<STX>Example for printing control codes<CR><ETX>
<STX><SUB><NUL><SUB><SOH><DLE><STX><DLE><ETX><SUB><EOT>
<SUB><ENQ><SUB><ACK><SUB><BEL><SUB><BS><SUB><HT><SUB><LF>
<SUB><VT><SUB><FF><SUB><CR><SUB><SO><SUB><SI>
<SUB><DLE><DLE>
<SUB><DC1><SUB><DC2><ETX>
<STX><CR><ETX>
<STX><SUB><DC3><SUB><DC4><SUB><NAK><SUB><SYN><SUB><ETB>
<SUB><CAN><SUB><EM><SUB><SUB><SUB>
<ESC><SUB><FS><SUB><GS><SUB><RS><SUB><US><ETX>
<STX><US>1<ETX>
<STX><RS>1<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 89

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Direct Graphics Mode, Select

Purpose: Allows you to download graphic images directly into image memory
without storing them in nonvolatile RAM.
Syntax: <ESC>gm
where m specifies the format of the data to follow.
Direct Graphics Mode, Select - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Values for m Notes
3400C 0 = 8 bits per byte When the printer is in Direct
3400e (default) Graphics mode, the printer treats all
1 = 8 bits per byte that Immediate commands as Direct
have been nibblized Graphics commands.
3440 0 = 8 bits per byte
(default)
1 = 8 bits per byte that
have been nibblized
44X0 0 = 8 bits per byte
(default)
1 = 8 bits per byte that
have been nibblized
7421, PC41 0 = 8 bits per byte
(default)
1 = 8 bits per byte that
have been nibblized
EasyCoder F4, 0 = 8 bits per byte When the printer is in Direct
PD41, PF2i, PF4i, (default) Graphics mode, the printer treats all
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i 1 = 8 bits per byte that Immediate commands as Direct
have been nibblized Graphics commands.

Notes: For more information on direct graphics, see Appendix E, “Using Direct
Graphics Mode.”

Emulation Mode, Enter

Purpose: Instructs the printer to enter Emulation mode (default is Advanced Mode).
Syntax: <ESC>cn
where n specifies the dot size. For all printers, valid values for n are:
0 10 mil (0.010 inch) dot size
1 15 mil (0.015 inch) dot size for bar codes only (other fields are 10 mil)
For all printers, the default value for n is 0.
Notes: Emulation mode lets you print bar code labels that were designed on an
86XX printer in multiples of 10 or 15 mil.
The field pointer designates the first field in format 0.
You disable the page select command and lose all previously host-entered
data.

90 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Field, Select
Purpose: Selects a data field for entering or working with data.
Syntax: <ESC>Fn or <ESC>F”name”
where n is the number of the field. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to
199. Default is 0.
Notes: The parameter for this command can either be the field number or the field
name, but not both. If neither is present, the printer defaults to 0.
If you use the field number, the printer enters all following data into field n.
If you use the field name, the printer enters all following data into all fields
with the specified name in the current format or page. You must bracket the
field name with quotation marks (“ ”).
The printer generates an error code (38) if you enter an invalid field
number.
The following example illustrates employing the Field, Select command to
enter data into a field identified by a number:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o450,50;c0;f3;h3;w2;b10;d0,35<ETX>
<STX>H1;o300,50;c0;h2;w2;f3<ETX>
<STX>B2;o250,50;c0,3;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX>
<STX><ESC>F0<DEL>Example printing by field number<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F1<DEL>This is a test<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F2<DEL>Test<ETX>
<STX><US>1<ETX>
<STX><RS>1<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>The following example illustrates employing
the Field, Select command to enter data into a field
identified by a name:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1;<ETX>
<STX>H0,Example;o450,50;c0;f3;h3;w2;b10;d0,35<ETX>
<STX>H1,Text;o300,50;c0;h2;w2;f3<ETX>
<STX>B2,Barcode;o250,50;c0,3;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX>
<STX><ESC>F"Example"<DEL>Example printing by field
name<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F"Text"<DEL>This is a test<ETX>
<STX><ESC>F"Barcode"<DEL>Test<ETX>
<STX><US>1<ETX>
<STX><RS>1<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 91

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Field Decrement, Set

Purpose: Sets the field decrement value for the selected field.
Syntax: <ESC>Dn
where n is the field decrement value. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to
1999. Default is 1.
Notes: In the section of data separated by <FS> or <GS>, the printer decrements
the values in data entry fields by n after it prints each batch.
The printer generates an error code (22) if the decrement value is out of
range.

Field Increment, Set

Purpose: Sets the increment value for the selected field.
Syntax: <ESC>In
where n is the increment value. For all printers, the range for n is 1 to 1999.
Default is 1.
Notes: In the section of data separated by <FS> or <GS>, the printer increments
the values in data entry fields by n after it prints each batch. You must use
this command when you are defining a format in Programming mode. This
example shows how to use the field increment command:
<STX><ESC>E5<CAN><ETX>
<STX>Lot 23455 262948<CR><FS>307 91747<FS><ESC>I2<ETX>
<STX><RS>5<ETB><ETX>
The printer generates an error code (22) if the increment value is out of
range.

First Data Entry Field, Select

Purpose: Sets the field pointer to the lowest numbered data entry field that can
accept Print mode data.
Syntax: <ACK>
Notes: This command ensures that data prints in the field with the lowest number
if you do not want to specify a data field by its field number.

92 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Font, Transmit
Purpose: Uploads a font from the printer in the form of commands and data the
printer receives to create the font.
Syntax: <ESC>vn
where n is the font ID number.
Font, Transmit - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 None 0 to 28, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3400A None 0 to 24
3400B, 3400C None 0 to 25, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3400D
3400e None 0 to 28, 30 to 41 and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3440 None 0 to 28, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3600 None 0 to 25, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option
4100 None 0 to 24
4400 None 0 to 25
44X0 None 0 to 28, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option
4X30 None 0 to 28, 30 to 41
7421, PC41 None 0 to 28, 30 to 41
EasyCoder F4, None 0 to 28, 30 to 41
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: The font names are listed in the “Font Type, Select” command on
page 137.
If you send <ESC>v to the printer without specifying a value for n, the
printer (except for the 3400A, 3400B, 3600, and 4400) uploads the entire
user-defined fonts directory. The directory appears in this format:
IDnumber, name, type, storagesize<CR><LF>
where:
IDnumber is the font number that was specified by n in the command
that created the user-defined font.
name is the optional font name that may have been specified by
,name in the command that created the user-defined font.
type is 200 for Bitmap fonts, 300 for Speedo outline fonts, or 301
for TrueType fonts.
storagesize is 0 for resident fonts.
Always transmit fonts in Advanced mode.
The target printer remains in Advanced mode. The printer generates an
error code (27) if you enter an invalid number.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 93

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Form Feed
Purpose: Feeds a label out to the next print point.
Syntax: <FF>
Notes: If you use self-strip, the printer feeds out one blank label to the strip pin,
skipping an entire label. If you use batch operation with die-cut label stock,
the label moves to the tear bar.
If you use continuous label stock, the label stock moves the same amount as
the end-of-print skip distance.

Format, Select
Purpose: Selects a format for data entry or printing.
(RFID) If you have fixed data, this command writes to the RFID tag.
Syntax: <ESC>En[,m]
where:
n is the numeric format ID.
m specifies whether to reimage the entire label or just the changed fields.

Format, Select - Values Listed by Printer

Printer Default Values for n Values for m Notes
3240 n=0 0 to 99 0 = reimage entire label.
1 = reimage only changed fields.
3400A n=0 0 to 19 0 = reimage entire label.
3400B 1 = reimage only changed fields.
3400C n=0 *, 0 to 19 Not available Use * for the label format to
3400D temporarily store the format in
RAM.
3400e n=0 *, 0 to 99 Not available Use * for the label format to
temporarily store the format in
RAM.
3440 n=0 *, 0 to 99 Not available Use * for the label format to
temporarily store the format in
RAM.
3600 n=0 0 to 19 0 = reimage entire label.
1 = reimage only changed fields.
4400 n=0 0 to 19 0 = reimage entire label.
1 = reimage only changed fields.
44X0 n=0 *, 0 to 99 Not available Use * for the label format to
temporarily store the format in
RAM.
4X30 n=0 0 to 19 Not available Use * for the label format to
temporarily store the format in
RAM.
7421, PC41 n = 0 *, 0 to 99 Not available Use * for the label format to
temporarily store the format in
RAM.

94 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Format, Select - Values Listed by Printer (continued)

Printer Default Values for n Values for m Notes
EasyCoder n = 0 *, 0 to 99 Not available Use * for the label format to
F4, PD41, temporarily store the format in
PF2i, PF4i, RAM.
PM4i, PX4i,
PX6i

Notes: If you select a page other than 0, n is an alphabetic format position within
the page with a range from a to z.
After you select the format, the field pointer points to the lowest numbered
data entry field.
The printer must be able to completely image a label, within the available
number of image bands, for the reimaging command to work and retain the
image. The printer starts imaging the label as soon as it receives the
command to select a format.
The printer clears all host entered/variable data from this format.
The printer generates an error code (36) if you enter an invalid format
number.

Format, Transmit
Purpose: Uploads a format from the printer in the form of commands and data the
printer uses to create the format.
Syntax: <ESC>xn
where n is the format ID number.
Format, Transmit - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 None 0 to 19
3400A, 3400B None 0 to 19
3400C, 3400D, 3400e None 0 to 99
3440 None 0 to 99
3600 None 0 to 19
4100 None 0 to 19
4400 None 0 to 19
44X0 None 0 to 99
4X30 None 0 to 19
7421, PC41 None 0 to 99
EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, None 0 to 99
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 95

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Format, Transmit (Continued)

Notes: If you send <ESC>x to the printer without specifying a value for n, the
printer (except for the 3400A, 3400B, 3600, and 4400) uploads the entire
format directory. The directory appears in this format:
[IDnumber] [name] [type] [storagesize]<CR><LF>
where:
IDnumber is the format number specified in the command that created the
format.
name is the optional format name specified by name in the command
that created the format.
type is 0 for formats.
storagesize is the number of bytes needed to store the format.
The target printer remains in Advanced mode. The printer generates an
error code (25) if you enter an invalid number.

Increment and Decrement, Disable

Purpose: Resets any increment or decrement flags for the current field.
Syntax: <ESC>N

Memory Usage, Transmit

Purpose: Uploads information on the amount of memory installed or allocated and
the amount of memory not being used.
Syntax: <ESC>mn
where n specifies the type of the memory.
Memory Usage, Transmit - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3400e n=0 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory not being used.
1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM,
or Flash RAM.
3440 n=0 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory not being used.
1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM,
or Flash RAM.
44X0 n=0 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory not being used.
1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM,
or Flash RAM.
EasyCoder F4, n=0 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory not being used.
PD41, PF2i, PF4i, 1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i or Flash RAM.

96 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Memory Usage, Transmit (Continued)

Notes: The printer uploads the amount of total storage memory available for
formats, fonts, and UDCs. The amount of available RAM not being used
follows the amount of total RAM. The printer separates the numbers by a
comma: 32,10.
This command was called Storage Area Usage, Transmit in older versions of
the 3240, 3400, and 3600 printer manuals. This command is called Static
RAM Usage, Transmit in the 4400 printer manual.

Next Data Entry Field, Select

Purpose: Moves the field pointer to the next data entry field.
Syntax: <CR>
Notes: If you have not selected a page and the pointer is designating the last field,
the field pointer moves back to the first data entry field in the format. If
you selected a multiformat page and the field pointer is pointing to the last
field in a format, it moves to the first field in the next format.

Numeric Field Separator

Purpose: Specifies which numeric data within a field to increment or decrement. You
must enclose the data between two sets of <FS> commands:
<FS>data<FS>
Syntax: <FS>
Notes: You can have more than one region per field as long as they do not overlap.
The printer independently increments or decrements each region according
to the increment or decrement value specified for the field. The length of
data does not change. Rather, the values increment or decrement as in an
odometer: 9 increments to 0. The printer ignores any non-numeric
characters within the region.
The following example illustrates the Numeric Field Separator command:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o175,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX>
<STX>H2;o75,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX>
<STX>H3;o200,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX>
<STX>H4;o100,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX>
<STX><CR><ESC>I1<FS>1<FS><ETX>
<STX><CR><ESC>D1<FS>10<FS><ETX>
<STX><CR>Increment Field<ETX>
<STX><CR>Decrement Field<ETX>
<STX><RS>3<ETB><ETX>

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 97

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Options Selected, Transmit

Purpose: Uploads the list of selected options.
Syntax: <ESC>O

Options Selected, Transmit - Values Returned by Printer

Printer Values Returned by Printer
3240 0 = No options selected
4 = Self-strip
3400A 0 = No options selected
3400B 4 = Self-strip
3400C 0 = No options selected
3400D 1 = Cutter
4 = Self-strip
3400e 0 = No options selected
1 = Cutter
4 = Self-strip
3440 0 = No options selected
4 = Self-strip
3600 0 = No options selected
4 = Self-strip
4100 0 = No options selected
1 = Cutter
4 = Self-strip
5 = Ribbon save
4400 0 = No options selected
1 = Cutter
2 = Batch takeup
3 = Self-strip and applicator
4 = Self-strip
44X0 0 = No options selected
1 = Cutter
2 = Batch takeup (if you have the option installed)
4 = Self-strip
4X30 0 = No options selected
1 = Cutter
2 = Batch takeup
3 = Self-strip and applicator
4 = Self-strip
7421, PC41 0 = No options selected
1 = Cutter
EasyCoder F4, 0 = No options selected
PD41, PF2i, 1 = Cutter
PF4i, PM4i, 4 = Self-strip
PX4i, PX6i
EasyCoder 0 = No options selected
PM4i (RFID) 1 = Cutter
4 = Self-strip
6 = RFID

98 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Page, Select
Purpose: Selects a page for data entry or printing.
(RFID) If you have fixed data, this command writes to the RFID tag.
Syntax: <ESC>Gn
where n is the page ID number. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to 9.
Default is 0.
Notes: After you select the page, the field pointer points to the lowest numbered
data entry field of the lowest position format.
The printer clears all host-entered data from this page.
The printer generates an error code (36) if you enter an invalid page
number.

Page, Transmit
Purpose: Uploads a page from the printer in the form of commands used to create a
format. It also uploads all formats in a page.
Syntax: <ESC>yn
where n is the page ID number. For all printers, the range for n is 1 to 9.
Notes: If you send <ESC>y to the printer without specifying a value for n, the
printer uploads the entire page directory. The directory appears in this
format:
[IDnumber] [name] [type] [storagesize]<CR><LF>
where:
IDnumber is the page number specified in the command that created the
page.
name is the optional page name specified by name in the command
that created the format.
type is 1 for pages.
storagesize is always 0 for a page.
The target printer remains in Advanced mode. The printer generates an
error code (26) if you enter an invalid number.

Print
Purpose: Prints the current page or format with previously entered data.
(For the PM4i with the RFID option only) Writes data to the RFID tag.
Syntax: <ETB>

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 99

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Printhead Parameters, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the number and size of dots in the printhead back to the host.
Syntax: <ESC>H
Notes: Here is an example of what you can expect to see: 896,5.0.

Program Mode, Enter

Purpose: Causes the printer to enter Program mode for the purpose of creating or
editing pages, formats, fonts, or graphics.
Syntax: <ESC>P
Notes: When this command is executed, you lose all previously entered data.

Program Number, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits both the program number and the version number.
Syntax: <ESC>Mn
where n returns the program and version numbers. Valid values for n are:
0 returns program # and version # (default)
1 returns program #, version #, and model # (supported by 3400e and
44x0 only)
Here is an example of what you might see: 059877,1.4.
For the 3400e, <ESC>M1 returns program #, version #, and 3400E2 or E4
(200 dpi/400 dpi)
Notes: This command uploads the program and software version number to the
host as an ASCII alphanumeric character string.

Quantity Count, Set

Purpose: Sets the quantity of label batches to be printed by the next print command.
Syntax: <RS>n
where n is the number of batches. For all printers, the range for n is 1 to
9999. Default is 1.
Here is an example of how to use this command:
<STX><RS>5<ETB><ETX>
Notes: The printer generates an error code (21) if the quantity is out of range.
Data increments or decrements between batches of labels.

100 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

RFID Tag, Read

Purpose: Tells the printer to read the data from the RFID tag. This command is
supported only by the PM4i with the RFID option.
Syntax: <ESC>Jn,m,p,q
where:
n specifies the data format as described in the next table.
Value for n Data Format
0 NUM
1 (default) HEX
2 ASCII
3 SSCC-96
4 SSCC-64
5 SGTIN-96
6 SGTIN-64
7 EPC-URN
8 EPC-HEX96
9 EPC-HEX64
10 SGLN-96
11 SGLN-64
12 GRAI-96
13 GRAI-64
14 GIAI-96
15 GIAI-64
16 GID-96
17 USDOD-96
18 USDOD-64

m specifies a tag segment from which data is read. Valid values for m:
1 ID (default)
2 Data
3 All
p specifies the first byte of the declared segment (,m) from which the
data is read (start of read). Value for p varies by RFID tag type (default
is 0). The first byte of the segment is always 0, regardless of the
segment’s physical location on the tag.
q specifies how many bytes of data that are read (length of read). Value
for q varies by RFID tag type (default is 8). The length of field data
may differ, depending on the segment and tag air interface ISO
standard.
Notes: If the tag read fails, an error status of <SOH> is set. If auto-transmit level 3
is enabled, an <SOH> status response is returned to the host.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 101

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print

Purpose: Instructs the current Code 39 field to print only the start and stop
characters.
Syntax: <ESC><SP>
where <SP> is the space character.
Notes: The printer clears all previous data from the current field.

Storage Area Usage, Transmit

See the “Memory Usage, Transmit” command on page 96.

Test and Service Mode, Enter

Purpose: Enters Test and Service mode.
Syntax: <ESC>T
Notes: The printer completes all print jobs before executing this command. When
the printer enters Test and Service mode, it erases any host-entered data
that was sent prior to the command.

User-Defined Characters, Transmit

Purpose: Uploads a graphic (user-defined character) from the printer in the form of
commands and data the printer receives to create the graphic.
Syntax: <ESC>un
where n is the graphic ID number. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to
99.
Notes: If you send <ESC>u to the printer without specifying a value for n, the
printer (except for the 3400A, 3400B, 3600, and 4400) uploads the entire
graphics directory. The directory appears in this format:
[IDnumber] [name] [type] [storagesize]<CR><LF>
where:
IDnumber is the graphic number that was specified by n in the command
that created the graphic.
name is the optional graphic name that may have been specified by
,name in the command that created the graphic.
type is 100 for a graphic.
storagesize is the number of bytes needed to store the graphic.
If the printer is in Advanced mode, each data byte represents six bits of the
graphic bitmap. If the printer is in Emulation mode, each data byte
represents one bit of the graphic image.
The printer generates an error code (28) if you enter an invalid number.

102 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

User-Defined Tables, Transmit

Purpose: Causes the printer to upload the user-defined command and protocol tables
that the printer receives to download a new command set.
This command is not supported by the EasyCoder 7421, F4, PC41, PD41,
PF4i, PF6i, PM4i, PX4i, or PX6i printers.
Syntax: <ESC>Zt
where t identifies the table. For all supported printers, valid values for t are:
0 Print mode commands
1 Escape print commands
2 Shift print commands
3 Status response
4 Protocol characters
Notes: You can find tables listing the default values in Appendix D, “User-Defined
Interface Tables.”
The printer generates an error code (12) if you enter an invalid number.
Use this command to substitute protocol and command characters.

Warm Boot
Purpose: Resets the printer with a warm boot.
Syntax: <BS>
Notes: Unlike the <DLE> command, this command does not take effect
immediately. The printer executes all previous commands before the warm
boot takes effect.
You will lose any data that is sent after this command and before the printer
finishes rebooting. Use this command when configuration changes require
a printer reset.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 103

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Configuration Commands
Use configuration commands to set parameters for configuration features
and to enable or disable options. When using configuration commands
with printers with RFID modules, these commands affect how the RFID
tag interacts with the printer.
Configuration commands are effective when the printer is in Print mode.
You can switch to Print mode with this command:
<STX>R<ETX>
For help downloading configuration commands to the printer, see
“Sending IPL Commands to the Printer” on page 5.

Note: You must precede each string of commands with the start of message
character <STX> and follow it with the end of message character <ETX>.
The printer terminates a configuration command when it receives the next
command in the message.
After reconfiguring your printer, you must cycle power or reset the printer
for the commands to become effective unless specified otherwise; however,
when configuring the 3400e, 4420, and 4440 printers, do not cycle power
using the hardware power switch. You must send the Reset command
(<BS> character) after issuing the new configuration command or
commands.

Amount of Storage, Define

Purpose: Specifies the amount of RAM you have allocated for storage.
Syntax: <SI>Nn
where n is the amount of RAM in kilobytes.

Amount of Storage, Define - Values Listed by Printer

Without Expanded RAM With Expanded RAM
Printer Default Values for n Default Values for n
3240 n = 60 10K to 120K n = 200 10K to 504K
3400A n = 20 10K to 32K n = 120 10K to 128K
3400B n = 60 10K to 120K n = 200 10K to 504K
3400C
3400D
3600 n = 60 10K to 120K n = 200 10K to 504K
4100 n = 20 10K to 32K n = 120 10K to 128K

Notes: The printer buffers this command until you execute it. When you execute
this command, it erases all previously stored format, fonts, or UDCs but
does not change the printer configuration. Use this command with printers
that share image generation and format/UDC/fonts storage area.

104 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Turns the audible alarm feature on or off.
This command is supported by the 4400 and the EasyCoder PD41, PF2i,
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, and PX6i printers.
Syntax: <SI>an
where n enables or disables the alarm. For all supported printers, valid
values for n are:
0 Turns the alarm off (default).
1 Turns the alarm on.

Auto-Transmit 1, Enable
Purpose: Enables auto-transmit level 1.
Syntax: <ESC>j
Notes: The printer uploads the status in the following order of priority for
Intermec Standard Protocol. See Appendix D, “User-Defined Interface
Tables,” for codes for other protocols.
<DC1> Fault cleared.
(<DC2> transmitted when Flow Control Protocol selected.)
<FS> Label at strip pin
<BS> Takeup reel full
<EM> No label stock
<US> Ribbon fault
<US> Label path open

Auto-Transmit 2, Enable
Purpose: Enables auto-transmit level 2.
Syntax: <ESC>d
Notes: At level 2, the printer automatically transmits the status response code
indicating room in input buffer (<DC1> for Standard Protocol and <DC2>
for Flow Control Protocol). Without auto-transmit enabled, the host must
use the <ENQ> or <VT> command to determine the status.

Auto-Transmit 3, Enable
Purpose: Enables auto-transmit level 3.
(RFID) The statuses are set after the RFID tag is read from or written to.
They are erased when the label is printed.
Syntax: <ESC>e

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 105

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Auto-Transmit 3, Enable (Continued)

Notes: The printer transmits a status response when this condition occurs:
<ACK> RFID tag write successful
<EOT> RFID tag write error
<HT> Imager overrun
<RS> Insufficient RAM for printing or storage
<SOH> Printing is complete and the buffer is empty
<VT> RFID tag read error

Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable

Purpose: Disables the auto-transmit status responses.
Syntax: <ESC>k

Communication Port Configuration, Set

Purpose: Sets the serial and parallel port configuration.
Syntax: <SI>P[n1][,n2][,n3][,n4][,n5][,n6]
where:
n1 sets the baud rate.
n2 sets the parity.
n3 sets the data bits.
n4 sets the protocol.
n5 sets the Multi-Drop address (if you are using Multi-Drop).
n6 sets the parallel port mode.

Communication Port Configuration, Set - Values Listed by Printer

Values Values Values Values Values Values
Printer Defaults for n1 for n2 for n3 for n4 for n5 for n6
7421, PC41 n1 = 3 0 = 1,200 0 = None 0 = 7 bits 0 = XON/ XOFF A - Z, 0 = Centronic
n2 = 0 1 = 2,400 1 = Even 1 = 8 bits 1 = XON/ XOFF 0-5 Mode
n3 = 1 2 = 4,800 2 = Odd with status 1 = 1284 Nibble
n4 = 0 3 = 9,600 Mode
2 = Intermec
n5 = A 4 = 19,200
Standard
n6 = 0
3 = Polling
Mode D
EasyCoder n1 = 3 0 = 1,200 0 = None 0 = 7 bits 0 = XON/ XOFF Not Not available
F4 n2 = 0 1 = 2,400 1 = Even 1 = 8 bits 2 = Intermec available
n3 = 1 2 = 4,800 2 = Odd Standard
n4 = 0 3 = 9,600
4 = 19,200
5 = 38,400
6 = 57,600
7 = 115,200

106 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Communication Port Configuration, Set - Values Listed by Printer (continued)

Values Values Values Values Values Values
Printer Defaults for n1 for n2 for n3 for n4 for n5 for n6
EasyCoder n1 = 3 0 = 1,200 0 = None 0 = 7 bits 0 = XON/ XOFF Not Not available
PD41, PF2i, n2 = 0 1 = 2,400 1 = Even 1 = 8 bits 1 = XON/ XOFF available
PF4i, PM4i, n3 = 1 2 = 4,800 2 = Odd with status
PX4i, PX6i n4 = 0 3 = 9,600
2 = Intermec
4 = 19,200
Standard
5 = 38,400
6 = 57,600
7 = 115,200

Control Panel Access Permission, Set

Purpose: Sets a security level to restrict access to certain menus.
Syntax: <SI>An
where n specifies the menus that can be accessed.
Control Panel Access Permission, Set - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
4400 n=0 0 = Allows access to all menus (operator, configuration,
installation, and test and service)
1 = Allows access to operator and configuration menus only
2 = Allows access to the operator menu only
3 = Denies access to all menus
4X30 n=0 0 = Allows access to all menus (operator, configuration,
installation, and test and service)
1 = Allows access to operator and configuration menus only
2 = Allows access to the operator menu only
3 = Denies access to all menus
EasyCoder n=0 0 = Allows access to all Setup menus
PD41, PF2i, 1 = Denies access to all Setup menus
PF4i, PM4i,
PX4i, PX6i

Cutter, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Turns the cutter feature on or off if the cutter option is installed. Reset the
printer after sending this command.
This command is not supported by the 3400A, 3400B, or 3600 printers, or
by the EasyCoder F4 with IPL firmware earlier than v1.4.
Syntax: <SI>cn
where n enables or disables the cutter. For all supported printers, valid
values for n are:
0 Disables the cutter (default).
1 Enables the cutter.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 107

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Dark Adjust, Set

Purpose: Sets the dark adjust command. This command controls the print darkness
on the labels.
Syntax: <SI>dn
where n specifies the darkness setting. For all printers, the range for n is -10
(darkest) to +10 (lightest) in increments of 1. Default is 0.

Direct Graphics Emulation Mode, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Prints direct graphics with the same origin offset as a specific legacy printer.
This command is supported only by the PC41.
Syntax: <SI>on
where n enables or disables the emulation mode. Valid values for n are:
0 Emulate 7421 printer.
1 Direct graphics origin is the same as the format’s origin.

Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up

Purpose: Selects Emulation or Advanced printer operating mode on power-up.
Syntax: <SI>Cn
where n specifies the mode and mil.

Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up -

Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n Notes
3240 n=3 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil)
3400 n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
3400e 200 dpi: 200 dpi: You can only use the
n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) Advanced mode 2.5
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) mil option on the
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 3400e with the 400
400 dpi: 400 dpi: dpi option.
n=3 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil)
3440 n=3 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil)

108 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up -

Values Listed by Printer (continued)
Printer Default Values for n Notes
3600 n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
4100 n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
4400 n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
4420 n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
4440 n=3 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil)
7421, PC41 n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
EasyCoder n=1 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil)
F4, PD41, 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil)
PF2i, PF4i, 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil)
PM4i, PX4i,
PX6i

Notes: Emulation mode lets you print labels that were designed on an 86XX
printer in multiples of 10 or 15 mil. Advanced mode lets you print bar code
labels in multiples of 2.5 or 5 mil.

End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set

Purpose: Sets the end-of-print skip distance. This distance is a value in 5 mil
increments that the label advances after printing or when you pause
printing. This command is ineffective in self-strip applications.
Syntax: <SI>D[n]
where n is the distance in 5 mil increments (3.3 mil increments on 4X30
printers).

End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set - Values Listed by Printer

Printer Default Values for n
3240 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 118 Continuous Stock mode increments
3400 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 118 Continuous Stock mode increments

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 109

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set - Values Listed by Printer (continued)

Printer Default Values for n
3400e n=0 Label Stock Mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 123 Continuous Stock mode increments
3440 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 123 Continuous Stock mode increments
3600 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 118 Continuous Stock mode increments
4100 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 118 Continuous Stock mode increments
4400 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 141 Continuous Stock mode increments
44X0 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 132 Continuous Stock mode increments
4X30 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 94 Continuous Stock mode increments
7421 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 160 Continuous Stock mode increments
PC41 n=0 Label Stock mode 0 to 9999 in 5 mil
n = 136 Continuous Stock mode increments
EasyCoder F4, n=0 Label Stock mode
PF2i, PF4i n = 103 Continuous Stock mode
EasyCoder PD41 n = 0 Label Stock mode
n = 93 Continuous Stock mode
EasyCoder PM4i, n = 0 Label Stock mode
PX4i, PX6i n = 100 Continuous Stock mode

Notes: To advance the label out to the tear bar in label stock mode, set n to the
Continuous Stock mode value.
If you enter a value for n, it applies to both Continuous mode and Label
Stock mode, regardless of the mode in which you enter the value.
If you do not specify a value for n, the <SI>D command returns the printer
to the default.

IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Turns the IBM language translation feature on or off.
Syntax: <SI>in
where n enables or disables IBM translation. For all printers, valid values for
n are as follows:
0 Disables IBM translation.
1 Enables IBM translation.
Notes: This feature allows IBM compatible characters to replace standard ASCII
characters based on the current printer language (see your printer user’s
manual for international character sets). This command overrides the
language translation based on the current printer emulation.

110 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Intercharacter Delay, Set

Purpose: Sets the intercharacter delay. The intercharacter delay is the time delay
between characters in a message the printer transmits.
This command is not supported by the EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, or PX6i printers.
Syntax: <SYN>n
where n is the intercharacter delay in milliseconds. For all supported
printers, the range for n is 0 to 9999. Default is 0.

Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Enables or disables the interlabel ribbon save feature on the 4100 printer.
The printer ignores this command if the ribbon save option is not installed.
Syntax: <SI>sn
where n enables or disables the feature. Valid values for n are:
0 Disables interlabel ribbon save.
1 Enables interlabel ribbon save.

Label Rest Point, Adjust

Purpose: Adjusts the point at which labels stop for removal. Use this command for
self-strip and cutter applications.
Syntax: <SI>fn
where n specifies the label stop point. For all printers, the range for n is -30
(farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments. Default is 0.
Notes: You can also set this command by using the control panel or Test and
Service DIP switches. For help, see your printer user’s manual.

Label Retract, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Turns the label retract option on or off.
Syntax: <SI>Rn
where n enables or disables the label retract option. Valid values for n are:
0 Disables label retract.
1 Enables label retract (default)
2 (3400e, 44x0 only) Enables delayed retract.
Notes: If you select die-cut label stock, the printer determines the retract distance
automatically.
If you select continuous label stock, the printer uses the retract distance set
by the Label Retract Distance, Set command (see page 112).
If you select delayed retract, the printer waits until it receives the next print
command to retract.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 111

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Label Retract Distance, Set

Purpose: Sets the label retract distance.
Syntax: <SI>rn
where n specifies the label retract distance in 5 mil increments. For all
printers, the range for n is 0 to 399.
For the 4400, the default value for n is 284 (or 216 for the 6.5 mil
printhead). For all other printers, the default value for n is 0.
Notes: This command works with continuous label stock only. The label retracts
to this distance at the start of a print.

Label Stock Type, Select

Purpose: Selects the type of label stock.
Syntax: <SI>Tn
where n specifies the type of stock. For all printers, valid values for n are as
follows:
0 Continuous label stock (no breaks).
1 Label stock with gaps between labels (default).
2 Label stock with marks between labels (on back of label stock).
Notes: To make this command effective, reset the printer or turn the power off and
on again after issuing the command.

Label Width, Set

Purpose: Sets the label width to n in dot increments.
Syntax: <SI>Wn
where n is a number between the minimum and maximum number of dots
for your printer. Calculations for all printers (except the 4440 printer) use a
5 mil dot.
Label Width, Set - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n Notes
4400 n = 896 50 to 896 This command is effective
upon execution.
4400 with 6.5 n = 672 50 to 672 This command is effective
mil printhead upon execution.

44X0 4420: n = 896 4420: 50 to 896 This command is effective

4440: n = 1792 4440: 100 to 1792 upon execution. For the 4440
printer, n must be calculated
using 2.5 mil dot.
7421, PC41 n = 832 50 to 832 This command is effective
upon execution.

112 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Label Width, Set (Continued)

Notes: (44X0 only) When you print narrower labels, set this command to reduce
torque. You may need to experiment with this command until your labels
print properly. In high humidity environments, you may also want to use
the Takeup Motor Torque, Increase command.

Maximum Label Length, Set

Purpose: Defines the maximum label length.
Syntax: <SI>Ln
where n specifies the maximum label length in 5 mil increments.
Maximum Label Length, Set - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n = 1000 100 to 4800
3400 n = 1000 100 to 4800
3440 n = 1000 100 to 4800
3600 n = 1000 100 to 4800
4100 n = 1000 100 to 4800
4400 n = 1000 200 to 4800
44X0 n = 1000 100 to 4800
4X30 n = 1000 200 to 4800
7421, PC41 n = 1000 100 to 4800
EasyCoder F4, n = 1200 100 to 4800
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: The printer uses this number for detecting media faults. It does not use this
number to limit the image size of a format on the label.

Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set

Purpose: Sets the media fault recovery mode. This command is not supported by the
3240, 3400, 3440, 3600, 4100, or 4x30 printers.
Syntax: <SI>en
where n sets the recovery mode. For all supported printers, valid values for n
are:
0 Reprints interrupted label.
1 Does not reprint interrupted label.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 113

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Media Sensitivity, Select

Purpose: Selects the media sensitivity of the printer.
Syntax: <SI>gn[,m]
where:
n specifies direct thermal (DT) media or thermal transfer (TTR) media.
m specifies the sensitivity.

Media Sensitivity, Select - Values Listed by Printer

Printer Default Values for n Values for ,m Notes
3240 n=0 0 = Direct thermal 420 = Direct thermal You can only set n by
1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer using the DIP switches.
3400A n=0 0 = Direct thermal 420 = Direct thermal You can only set n by
3400B 1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer using the DIP switches.
3400C n=0 0 = Direct thermal 470 = Direct thermal You can only set n by
3400D 1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer using the DIP switches.
3400e n=0 0 = Direct thermal 470 = Direct thermal (2-5 ips) You can only set n by
1 = Thermal transfer 720 = Direct thermal (6-8 ips) using the DIP switches.
567 = Thermal transfer
3440 n=0 0 = Direct thermal 470 = Direct thermal You can only set n by
1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer using the DIP switches.
3600 n=0 0 = Direct thermal 420 = Direct thermal You can only set n by
1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer using the DIP switches.
4100 n=0 0 = Direct thermal 420 = Direct thermal You can only set n by
1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer using the Transfer On
switch on the front of the
4100 printer.
4400 n=0 0 = Direct thermal 420 = Direct thermal This command is effective
1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer after you cycle printer
power.
44X0 n=0 0 = Direct thermal 470 = Direct thermal (2-5 ips) You can only set n by
1 = Thermal transfer 720 = Direct thermal (6-8 ips) using the DIP switches.
567 = Thermal transfer
4X30 n=0 0 = Direct thermal Not available The ,m parameter is not
1 = Thermal transfer available for the 4630 and
4830 printers.
7421, PC41 n = 0 0 = Direct thermal 180 = Direct thermal
1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer
EasyCoder n = 0 0 = Direct thermal 420 = Direct thermal
F4, PD41, 1 = Thermal transfer 567 = Thermal transfer
PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i,
PX6i

Notes: For help setting m, see your printer user’s manual.

This command was called TTR/Direct Thermal Media Grade, Select in the
4630 and 4830 printers user’s manual.

114 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Message Delay, Set

Purpose: Sets the message delay to n milliseconds.
This command is not supported by the EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, or PX6i printers.
Syntax: <ESC><SYN>n
where n is the number of milliseconds to delay the start of a printer
transmission. For all supported printers, the range for n is 0 to 9999.
Default is 0.

Number of Image Bands, Set

Purpose: Selects the number of image bands.
This command is not supported by the EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, or PX6i printers.
Syntax: <SI>In
where n is the number of image bands. For supported printers, this
command is effective upon execution.
Number of Image Bands, Set - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n=3 2 to 5 if the printer has 128K of static RAM.
2 to 7 if the printer has expanded RAM.
3400 n=3 2 to 6 if the printer has 32K of static RAM.
2 to 12 if the printer has expanded RAM
3400e n=3 200 dpi: 2 to 20 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM.
400 dpi: 2 to 9 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM. 2 to 20 if the
printer has expanded memory.
3440 n=3 2 to 9 if the printer has 1 MB of DRAM.
2 to 20 if the printer has expanded memory.
3600 n=3 2 to 13 if the printer has 128K of static RAM.
2 to 25 if the printer has expanded RAM.
4100 n=3 2 to 6 if the printer has 32K of static RAM.
2 to 12 if the printer has expanded RAM.
4400 n=3 2 to 10 if the printer has 512K of RAM.
44X0 n=3 4420: 2 to 20 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM.
4440: 2 to 9 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM. 2 to 20 if the
printer has expanded memory.
7421, n=3 2 to 12 if the printer has 512K of DRAM.
PC41

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 115

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Online or Offline on Power-Up

Purpose: Selects the printer to be online or offline when it is turned on.
This command is supported only by the 4400 and 4x30 printers.
Syntax: <SI>On
where n specifies online or offline. Valid values for n are:
0 Printer is online at power up (default).
1 Printer is offline at power up.

Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set

Purpose: Sets the protocol for pin 11/20.
Syntax: <SI>pn[,m]
where:
n sets the protocol for pin 20 (DTR).
m sets the protocol for pin 11 (PS).
Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n and m Notes
3400e n=0 0 = The pin follows the software protocol
44X0 m=0 1 = Always ready (high)
2 = Flow control
3 = Ready/Busy
7421, n=0 0 = The pin follows the software protocol The 7421 and
PC41 m=0 1 = Always ready (high) PC41 use pins 6
2 = Flow control and 9 instead of
3 = Ready/Busy pins 20 and 11.

Notes: By default, the pin uses flow control if the serial port is set for XON/XOFF.
The pin uses ready/busy if the port is set to Intermec Standard protocol.
When you set a pin to always ready (high), the pin is held high as long as
the printer receives power.
When a pin is set to flow control, the pin is high when there is room in the
data buffer. The pin is held low when the data buffer is full.
When a pin is set to ready/busy, the pin is high when the printer status is
ready. The pin is held low when the printer is in one of these conditions:
• Offline
• Buffer full
• No label stock
• Ribbon fault
• Label at strip pin
• Printhead hot

116 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Postamble, Set
Purpose: Sets the postamble character.
Syntax: <EOT>n
where n specifies the postamble character. For all printers, n can be any
ASCII character. Default is <NUL> (printer does not send a postamble
character).

Preamble, Set
Purpose: Sets the preamble character.
Syntax: <SOH>n
where n specifies the preamble character. For all printers, n can be any
ASCII character. Default is <NUL> (printer does not send a preamble
character).

Print Speed, Set

Purpose: Sets the print speed.
Syntax: <SI>Sn
where n specifies the print speed.
Print Speed, Set - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n = 30 20, 30, or 40 (corresponding to 2, 3, or 4 ips)
3400A 3400B n = 30 20, 30, 40, or 50
3400C 3400D n = 30 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60
3400e n = 30 200 dpi:
20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 (no self-strip)
20, 30, 40, 50, 60 (with self-strip)
400 dpi:
20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 (no self-strip)
20, 30, 40, 50 (with self-strip)
3440 n = 30 20, 30, 40, or 50
3600 n = 30 20, 30, 40, or 50
4100 n = 30 20, 30, 40, or 50
4400 n = 35 5 mil printhead:
A number from 25 to 100 in multiples of 5.
6.5 mil printhead:
A number from 25 to 85 in multiples of 5.
44X0 n = 30 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 100 (no self-strip)
20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, or 80 (self-strip)
4X30 n = 35 20 to 80 in multiples of 5
7421 n = 20 20
PC41 n = 30 20, 30, 40

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 117

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Print Speed, Set - Values Listed by Printer (continued)

Printer Default Values for n
EasyCoder F4, n = 50 40, 50, 60, 70, 80
PF2i, PF4i, PM4i,
PX4i, PX6i
EasyCoder PD41 300 dpi: n = 30 300 dpi: 20, 30, 40
203 dpi: n = 50 203 dpi: 20, 30, 40, 50, 60

Printer Language, Select

Purpose: Selects the printer language.
Syntax: <SI>ln
where n specifies the language as follows:
Printer Language, Select - Values for n
n Language n Language
0 U.S.A. 13 Code Page 1252, Latin 1, Western Europe
1 United Kingdom 14 Code Page 1253, Greek
2 Germany 15 Code Page 1254, Turkish
3 Denmark 16 Code Page 1255, Hebrew
4 France 17 Code Page 1256, Arabic
5 Sweden 18 Code Page 1257, Baltic Rim
6 Italy 19 Code Page 1258, Vietnamese
7 Spain 20 Code Page 874, Thai
8 8-Bit ASCII 30 Code Page 932, Shift JIS, Japanese
9 Switzerland 31 Code Page 936, GB 2312-80, Simplified
Chinese
10 Code Page 850 32 Code Page 949, KSC5601, Korean
Hangeul
11 Code Page 1250, Central Europe 33 Code Page 950, Big 5, Traditional Chinese
12 Code Page 1251, Cyrillic, Russian 40 UTF-8

The next table specifies valid values for n for each printer.
Printer Language, Select - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n=0 0 – 10
3400A n=0 0–9
3400B
3400C n=0 0 – 10
3400D
3400e n=0 0 – 20, 30 – 33
3440 n=0 0 – 20, 30 – 33
3600 n=0 0 –9
4100 n=0 0–9
4400 n=0 0–9

118 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Printer Language, Select - Values Listed by Printer (continued)

Printer Default Values for n
44X0 n=0 0 – 20, 30 – 33
4X30 n=0 0 – 10
7421, PC41 n=0 0 – 10
EasyCoder F4 n=0 0 – 20
EasyCoder PD41, n=0 0 – 20, 40
PF2i, PF4i, PM4i,
PX4i, PX6i

Notes: You can only select one printer language per print job. Bitmap user-defined
fonts (including bitmap TrueType) do not use code pages. If your label
format requires several language fonts, you can:
• bitmap the TrueType fonts. For help, see “Creating Bitmap Fonts From
TrueType Fonts” on page 15.
• create your own bitmap fonts. For help, see “Creating User-Defined
Bitmap Fonts” on page 181.
Resident fonts (those that were installed at the factory) use language
selections 0 through 10. The default setting will probably provide all the
special characters you will need, but you may want to look through the
page tables in Appendix B, “Character Sets,” to determine if one of the
other languages (0 through 10) would be more suitable. Code pages 11
through 33 do not work with resident fonts.
If you are using a TrueType font (not bitmap), you must match the code
page to your language needs. Do not use languages 0 through 10 with
scalable TrueType fonts.
If you are using a downloaded scalable (that is, not bitmap) Japanese,
Chinese, or Korean TrueType font, you must first locate the correct code
page and download it to your printer. (All others are already stored in your
printer.) Select the corresponding code page using the Printer Language,
Select command. See Chapter 2 for more information about downloading
fonts and code pages. See Appendix B for tables of the character sets.
UTF-8 data is encoded using sequences of 1 to 4 bytes. The table below
summarizes the different byte sequences of UTF-8 data that is transformed
to a character number. The UTF-8 byte sequence (x, y, and z bits) in this
table represents a character number in the range of the left column.
UTF-8 Data Transformation
Character Number Range UTF-8 Byte Sequence
0000 – 007F, xxxxxxx 0xxxxxxx
0080 – 07FF, yyyyyxxxxxx 110yyyyy 10xxxxxx
0800 – FFFF, zzzzyyyyyyxxxxxx 1110zzzz 10yyyyyy 10xxxxxx
10000 – 10FFFF, TBD TBD

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 119

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Printer Language, Select (Continued)

The character number is calculated by getting the lower-order bits from the
last byte of the sequence and proceeding to the left until there are no x, y,
and z bits left. For example, the UTF-8 byte sequence to print a Greek “e”
is OxCE OxB5.
Note: Font 61 has the most international characters of all of the resident
fonts.

Printhead Loading Mode, Select

Purpose: Selects the printhead loading mode that affects how the whole image prints
on the label. Mirror Printing mode reverses the order in which data loads
into the printhead. Inverse Printing mode causes all pixels that are white to
invert to black and vice versa.
Syntax: <SI>hn[,m]
Printhead Loading Mode, Select - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Defaults Values for n Values for m
3400C n=0 0 = Normal printing 0 = Normal printing
3400D m=0 1 = Mirror Printing mode 1 = Inverse Printing mode
3400e
3440 n=0 0 = Normal printing 0 = Normal printing
m=0 1 = Mirror Printing mode 1 = Inverse Printing mode

44X0 n=0 0 = Normal printing 0 = Normal printing

m=0 1 = Mirror Printing mode 1 = Inverse Printing mode

7421 n=0 0 = Normal printing 0 = Normal printing

PC41 m=0 1 = Mirror Printing mode 1 = Inverse Printing mode

EasyCoder F4, n = 0 0 = Normal printing 0 = Normal printing

PD41, PF2i, m=0 1 = Mirror Printing mode 1 = Inverse Printing mode
PF4i, PM4i,
PX4i, PX6i

Note: The printhead is not under warranty if you use Inverse Printing mode for
batch printing. Intermec does not recommend using Inverse Printing mode
for batch printing. For best results with Inverse Printing mode, use a
maximum print density of 35 percent.

120 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Printhead Pressure, Set

Purpose: Compensates for variations in the thickness of label stock.
This command is supported only by the 4400.
Syntax: <SI>Hn
Printers: where n sets the printhead pressure. Valid values for n are:
0 Low printhead pressure
1 High printhead pressure
Notes: If your labels are slipping, or you notice that the pressure is too light, try
changing the pressure to the other setting.

Printhead Test Parameters, Set

Purpose: Sets the printhead test parameters.
This command is supported only by the 4400.
Syntax: <SI>Un[,m][,p][,q]
where:
n determines whether printing continues if the printhead test sends a
warning. Valid values for n are:
0 Printing continues when warning occurs.
1 Printing stops when warning occurs.
m is the positive threshold of the percentage of the allowable deviation in
resistance. The range for m is 10 to 45. Default is 45.
p is the negative threshold of the percentage of the allowable deviation
in resistance. The range for p is 10 to 45. Default is 45.
q specifies how often (in terms of the number of labels printed) to
automatically run the printhead resistance test. The range for q is 0 to
9999. Default is 0 (test is disabled).
Notes: This command is effective upon execution.

RFID Parameters, Set

Purpose: Sets the RFID mode (on or off ) and sets the TAGADJUST value and
number of label retries. These parameters are also visible in the Setup menu
on the printer console. This command is supported only by the PM4i with
the RFID option.
Syntax: <SI>Jn[,m][,p]
where:
n enables or disables RFID mode. Valid values for n are:
0 RFID mode is disabled and commands are ignored.
1 RFID mode is enabled (default)

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 121

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

RFID Parameters, Set (Continued)

m specifies the distance (in dots) a label must be moved from the default
start of print point to align the RFID tag over the antenna and enable
successful read and write operations to the tag’s memory.
Range for m is either a negative distance (in dots) from the thermal
printhead to the tear-off bar, or a positive distance up to the maximum
label length. For more information, see the Notes.
p specifies the number of labels to retry if accessing a tag fails. Range for
p is from 0 to 10. Default is 1. For more information, see the Notes.
Notes: A negative m value means the tag is originally positioned in front of the
antenna, and a positive m value means the label is originally positioned
behind the antenna.
If you change the start of print point, you may also need to change the
TAGADJUST value. The move distance = TAGADJUST –
STOPADJUST. STOPADJUST is any adjustment such as end-of-print
skip distance that is done at the end of a label.
For example, if TAGADJUST = 0 and End of Print (EOP) skip = 100, the
label retracts 100 to access the tag. If TAGADJUST = 100 and the EOP
skip = 100, the label does not move.
When using thermal transfer media, m should not be greater than the
maximum rewind spring allowance, since it will affect the print quality of
the label.
If a read or write operation to the tag’s memory fails, “VOID” or some
other text is printed on the label and the next label is tried. This procedure
is repeated until the read or write operation succeeds or until the specified
number of labels to retry is reached.
If p = 0, the printer does not print any “VOID” labels and the labels do not
advance.
If p = 1, a maximum of 1 “VOID” label prints and so on.
When using a cutter, the retract distance cannot be greater than the
distance from the cutter to the thermal printhead.

RFID Tag Void Text, Set

Purpose: Defines the text that is printed on labels that have bad RFID tags. This text
cannot be changed from the control panel.
This command is supported only by the PM4i with the RFID option.
Syntax: <SI>Kn
where n is the text that is printed. The range for n is 0 to 16 ASCII
characters. Default is VOID. If n is blank, this command is disabled.
Notes: Text prints using font 26, with 1.27 cm (0.5 in) tall characters printed in
the down direction.

122 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

RFID Tag Void Text, Set (Continued)

When the RFID module cannot communicate with the tag on the label,
this text will be printed at the start of the label or at the maximum retract
distance from the tag.

Ribbon Save Zones, Set

Purpose: Defines the start and stop points of a ribbon save zone within the label.
This command does not enable interlabel ribbon save. This command is
supported only by the 4100 with the ribbon save option installed.
Syntax: <SI>Zn[,m]
where n and m are the zone start and zone stop distances, in dot increments,
from the detected front of the label. The difference between n and m
depends on the speed (number of ips) at which you are printing. Also, m
must be bigger than n by at least 100, or the command will be ignored.
Notes: Setting a ribbon save zone enables ribbon save. Entering no ribbon save
zones clears all ribbon save zones within this label. If only one parameter is
entered, the command is ignored. The maximum number of zones possible
on one label is 10. This command is buffered up and becomes effective
upon execution.

Self-Strip, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Turns the self-strip (label taken sensor) option on or off. This command is
not supported by the 4100, but you can enable self-strip using the DIP
switches.
Syntax: <SI>tn [,m] [,o]
Printers: where:
n Enables or disables the option. Valid values for n are:
0 Self-strip is disabled (default).
1 Self-strip is enabled.
2 (PX4i, PX6i only) Self-strip is enabled and a VOID label rewinds
with the liner. If you choose this option, you also need to specify
,m and o.
3 (PX4i, PX6i only) Self-strip is enabled and the internal rewind
stepper motor starts. If you choose this option, you also need to
specify ,m.
,m (PX4i, PX6i only) If n = 2, ,m enables or disables rewinding. In this
case, valid values for ,m are:
0 Disables rewinding (default).
1 Enables rewinding.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 123

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Self-Strip, Enable or Disable (Continued)

If n = 3, then ,m sets the number of dots the rewind motor starts
before or after paper feeding begins. A positive value starts the motor
before paper feeding and a negative value starts the motor after paper
feeding. To turn the motor off, set ,m to -1.
,o (PX4i, PX6i only) Sets the number of dots that the internal rewind
stepper motor starts after the paper starts feeding. Default is 100.
Maximum value is the media length.

Serial Port Configuration, Set

See the “Communication Port Configuration, Set” command on
page 106.

Slash Zero, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Determines if the regular zero is replaced with a slashed zero.
This command is supported by the 3400e, 44x0e, and EasyCoder PD41,
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, and PX6i printers.
Syntax: <SI>zn
where n enables or disables the slashed zero character. For all supported
printers, valid values for n are:
0 Disables the slashed zero (default)
1 Enables the slashed zero.
Notes: This command only works if the Printer Language, Select command <SI>1
is set to 0 (USA). Also, it does not apply to OCR fonts 23 and 24.

Takeup Motor Torque, Increase

Purpose: Increases the takeup motor torque from 0 to 50% above the default value.
For printers with firmware version 2.5, this command varies the torque
from 75% below to 50% above the default value.
This command is supported only by the 44x0.
Syntax: <SI>bn
where n is the percentage above or below the default value to set the takeup
motor torque.
• For printers with firmware earlier than version 2.5, the range for n is 0
to 50.
• For printers with firmware version 2.5 and later, the range for n is -75 to
50.
Notes: In high humidity environments, you may want to use this command with
the Label Width, Set command.

124 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Top of Form, Set

Purpose: Sets the top of form (left margin or start print point) to n, which is the
distance in 5 mil increments from the label origin to its leading edge.
Syntax: <SI>Fn
where n sets the top of form. For all printers, the range for n is -10 to 4000
in 5 mil increments. Default is 20.
Notes: Negative values for n decrease the margin and print closer to the label edge.

Program Mode Commands

You can use program mode commands to design label formats and to
download user-defined fonts and graphics. When using program mode
commands with printers with RFID modules, these commands handle the
interaction with the chip in the RFID tag. For example, you can use a
command that specifies where in the tag’s memory, data is written.
When creating or editing formats, the printer uses a field pointer to
designate the field you are going to modify when the printer is in Program
mode. To download commands in Program mode, you must specify the
field you want to change. If you do not select a field, the pointer continues
to point to the last selected field until you select a different format or field.
New formats contain a default human-readable field numbered H0. New
pages do not contain a default format.
Program mode commands are effective when the printer is in Program
mode. You can switch the printer to Program mode with this command:
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
For help downloading program mode commands to the printer, see
“Sending IPL Commands to the Printer” on page 5.

Note: You must precede each string of commands with the start of message
character <STX> and follow it with the end of message character <ETX>.
The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. All commands in Program
mode must end with this terminator except the last command in a message.
The printer ignores parentheses [( )] and <LF> characters.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 125

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type

Purpose: Selects a symbology for a bar code field.
Syntax: cn[,m1][,m2][,m3]
where:
n is the symbology as described in the next table:
Bar Code, Select Type - Values for n
n Symbology n Symbology n Symbology
0 Code 39 8 HIBC Code 39 17 Data Matrix
1 Code 93 9 Code 16K 18 QR Code
2 Interleaved 2 of 5 10 Code 49 19 MicroPDF417
3 Code 2 of 5 11 POSTNET 20 RSS
4 Codabar 12 PDF417 21 EAN.UCC Composite
5 Code 11 14 MaxiCode 22 Planet (EasyCoder PD41,
PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, PX4i,
PX6i only)
6 Code 128 15 JIS-ITF 23 Aztec
7 UPC/EAN 16 HIBC Code 128

The next table shows valid n values for each printer.

Bar Code, Select Type - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 19
3400A n=0 0 - 11
3400B n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 17
3400C, 3400D n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 19
3440 n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 19
3600 n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 17
4100 n=0 Standard memory: 0 - 11
Expanded memory: 0 - 12, 14
4400 n=0 0 - 11
44X0, 3400e n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 20
4X30 n=0 0 - 12, 14, 16, 17
7421, PC41 n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 19
EasyCoder F4 n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 19
EasyCoder PD41, PF2i, n=0 0 - 12, 14 - 22
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

m1, m2, m3 are modifiers for the symbology specified by n. For more
information on valid m values, see the information for the
symbology in Appendix F, “Symbology Modifiers.”

126 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Bar Code Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Edits or creates a bar code field.
Syntax: Bn[,name]
where:
n is the field number of the field. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to
199. Default is 0.
name (optional) is a name for the field of up to eight ASCII characters.
The name cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes: When you create a bar code field, you automatically create an interpretive
field if you have enabled the Interpretive parameter. The printer generates
an error code (38) if the field number is out of range.

Bar Code Field Default Parameters

Parameter Syntax Default
Field origin o 0,0
Field direction f 0 degrees
Bar code type c Code 39
Check digits Disabled
Prefix None
Data length 20
Ratio r 3 to 1
Interpretive i Disabled
Height magnification h 50
Width magnification w 1

Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define

Purpose: Defines the height of a graphic or user-defined font.
Syntax: yn
where n is the number of rows for a bitmap font or a graphic, or the height
of the base character in number of dots for an outline font.
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define - Values Listed by
Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 999
n = 10 outline fonts
n = 50 graphics
3400 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 799
n = 10 outline fonts
n = 50 graphics

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 127

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define - Values Listed by

Printer (continued)
Printer Default Values for n
3400e n=1 bitmap fonts 200 dpi: 1 - 799
n = 10 outline fonts 400 dpi: 1 - 1599
n = 50 graphics
3440 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 1599
n = 10 outline fonts
n = 50 graphics
3600 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 599
n = 10 outline fonts
n = 50 graphics
4100 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 599
1 - 799 (with expanded memory)
4400 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 599
n = 10 outline fonts
n = 50 graphics
44X0 n=1 bitmap fonts 4420: 1 - 799
n = 10 outline fonts 4440: 1 - 1599
n = 50 graphics
4X30 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 599
n = 10 outline fonts
n = 50 graphics
7421, PC41 n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 799
n = 10 outline fonts
n = 50 graphics
EasyCoder F4, n=1 bitmap fonts 1 - 799
PD41, PF2i, PF4i, n = 10 outline fonts
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i
n = 50 graphics

Notes: The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height.

Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define

Purpose: Defines the maximum width for a graphic or any character in a font. Each
character has a width within this amount, which should be at least as wide
as the widest character in the font.
Syntax: xn
where n is the number of columns for the UDC, bitmap, or user-defined
font, or the width of the base character in number of dots for an outline
font.

Printer Default Values for n

3240 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 - 999
n = 10 (outline fonts) With expanded memory: 1 - 1999

128 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Printer Default Values for n

3400 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 – 799
n = 10 (outline fonts)
3400e n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 200 dpi: 1 - 799
n = 10 (outline fonts) 400 dpi: 1 - 1599
3440 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 – 1599
n = 10 (outline fonts)
3600 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 – 599
n = 10 (outline fonts)
4100 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 - 599
With expanded memory: 1 - 799
44X0 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 4420: 1 - 799
n = 10 (outline fonts) 4440: 1 - 1599
4400 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 – 599
n = 10 (outline fonts)
4X30 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 – 599
n = 10 (outline fonts)
7421, PC41 n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 - 799
n = 10 (outline fonts)
EasyCoder n = 1 (graphics/bitmap fonts) 1 - 799
F4, PD41, n = 10 (outline fonts)
PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i,
PX6i

Notes: The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width.

Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define

Purpose: Clears or creates a user-defined bitmap font set.
Syntax: Tn[,name]
where:
n is the font ID number of the field. For all printers, the range for n is
3 to 6 and 8 to 19.
name (optional) is a name for the field of up to eight ASCII characters.
The name cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes: If you have already defined font set n, the printer erases all previous
characters in the font. You can recreate an existing font, but you cannot edit
it. To change any characters, you must transmit the entire font set.

Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define

Purpose: Defines a border around a human-readable field.
Syntax: bn

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 129

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define - Values Listed by

Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 199
3400A, n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 199
3400B
3400C, 3400D n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 999

3400e n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 999

3440 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 999

3600 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 199

4100 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 199

4400 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 199

44X0 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 999

4X30 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 199

7421, PC41 n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 -999

EasyCoder F4, n=0 no borders (black letters) 0 - 999

PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: When n > 0, the field prints white letters with an n dot size border around
the field.

Box Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Accesses or creates a box field.
Syntax: Wn[,name]
Printers: where:
n is the field number of the field. For all printers, the range for n is 3 to
6 and 8 to 19.
name (optional) is a name for the field of up to eight ASCII characters.
The name cannot start with a numeric character.

130 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Notes: The next table describes the box field parameters.

Box Field Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Syntax Default
Field origin o 0,0
Field direction f 0 degrees
Box length l 100
Box height h 100
Box width w 1

Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define

Purpose: Defines the offset, to the right, of all characters in a bitmap font. If you
define each character’s width in columns, with the first column numbered
0, then the origin of each character is at the column with the same number
as n. For example, n = 2 shifts the character origins over two columns to the
right.
Syntax: Xn
where n is the number of columns to offset the origin to the right.
Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Default Values for n
3240 n=0 0 - 599
3400A n=0 0 - 599
3400B
3400C 3400D n=0 0 - 800
3400e
3440 n=0 0 - 800
3600 n=0 0 - 599
4100 n=0 0 - 599
4400 n=0 0 - 599
44X0 n=0 0 - 800
4X30 n=0 0 - 599
7421, PC41 n=0 0 - 800
EasyCoder F4, n=0 0 - 800
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define

Purpose: Defines the character rotation (either no rotation or 90° counterclockwise)
for human-readable fields, or the ratio of wide elements to narrow elements
for a bar code field.
Syntax: rn
where n defines the rotation, or the bar code ratio.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 131

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

For all printers, valid values for n are as follows for character rotation in a
human-readable field:
0 Horizontal (default)
1 90° counterclockwise
The next table lists valid values for n for setting the bar code ratio. For all
printers, this default value for n is 1.
Bar Code Ratio, Define - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Bar code ratio values for n
3240 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
Note: If the bar code width is odd and you select r0, the
printer substitutes r1.
The narrow elements of this code are always at least three
dots. Select a width of w = 1 to have the shortest symbol.
3400A n=0 2.5 to 1
3400B n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
3400C n=0 2.5 to 1
3400D n=1 3.0 to 1
3400e n=2 2.0 to 1
n=3 2.3 to 1
Note: n = 3 applies to Code 39 for a ratio of 7 dots to 3
dots.
3440 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
n=3 2.3 to 1
3600 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
4100 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
4400 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
44X0 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
n=3 2.3 to 1
4X30 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
7421, PC41 n=0 2.5 to 1
n=1 3.0 to 1
n=2 2.0 to 1
n=3 2.3 to 1

132 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Bar Code Ratio, Define - Values Listed by Printer (continued)

Printer Bar code ratio values for n
EasyCoder F4, PD41, n = 0 2.5 to 1
PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, n=1 3.0 to 1
PX4i, PX6i n=2 2.0 to 1
n=3 2.3 to 1

Code 39 Prefix Character, Define

Purpose: Defines the prefix for a Code 39 field (only valid for Code 39 fields).
Syntax: p[n1][n2][n3][n4];
where n is the prefix for the Code 39 field. For all printers, valid values for n
are A to Z (uppercase only) and 0 to 9.
Notes: Enter the prefix after you select Code 39. For example, enter c0,3;pABC4;
rather than pABC4;c0,3;.
When you enter the @ character as n1, it clears all prefixes. Prefix characters
do not appear in the interpretive field.

Command Tables, Load

Purpose: Downloads a command table, with t as the command table identifier. This
command table identifier is followed by the nibblized command entries
(c1-cn) to be loaded into the table. The printer expects two hex digits for
every entry in the table.
This command is not supported by the EasyCoder 7421, F4, PC41, PD41,
PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, and PX6i printers.
Syntax: C[t], [command 1], [command 2], ..., [command n]
where t is the command table identifier. For all supported printers, valid
values for t are:
0 Print mode commands
1 Escape print commands
2 Shift print commands
3 Status response
4 Protocol characters
Notes: Data must be nibblized ASCII characters ranging from 0 to 9 and A to F.
New commands become effective after you reset the printer or turn the
power off and back on. For help, see Appendix D, “User-Defined Interface
Tables.”
To change an entry in the table, you must send the entire table to the
printer as a string of ASCII characters in hexadecimal form. Any entry that
you do not redefine retains its old value. To modify only a few commands,
send the <ESC>Z command, capture the output, modify it, and send it
back to the printer.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 133

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Current Edit Session, Save

Purpose: Saves the current page, format, UDC, or UDF being edited. The printer
remains in Program mode.
Syntax: N
Notes: The printer automatically saves the current page, format, or UDC when
you call a new one or when you exit Program mode.

Data Source for Format in a Page, Define

Purpose: Defines a data source for a format assigned to a page position. This
command is not supported by the 4x30.
Syntax: en[,m1][,m2]
where:
n defines the data source. Valid values for n are:
0 Format receives its data during Print mode (default).
1 Format is slave of another format on this page.

m1 is the position of the master format within the page. Default is a.

m2 is the data offset to apply to the slave format. You can only offset data
that is delimited by numeric field separator <FS> or alphanumeric
field separator <GS>. Default is 0.
Notes: The format ID must be the same for both the master and slave formats.
For the 4x30, this command was called Format Page Position, Define Data
Source. All values are the same.

Field, Delete
Purpose: Deletes field n from the format.
Syntax: Dn
where n is the field number to delete. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to
199. Default is 0.
Notes: You cannot delete the last field in a format. If you delete the current field,
the field pointer points to the next field. If you delete a master field, you
also delete all slave fields of that master field.

Field Data, Define Source

Purpose: Defines a data source for the current field and how many characters are in
the field.
Syntax: dn[,m1][,m2]
where:

134 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

n defines the data source for the current field. For all printers, valid
values for n are:
0 Data entered in Print mode (default)
1 Data entered in Print mode
2 Data comes from field ,m1
(Not supported by PM4i with RFID option)
3 Fixed data
m1 is the number of characters in the current field. Set m1 if you choose
n = 0 or n = 1. For all printers, default for m1 is:
20 Bar code fields
30 Human-readable fields
64 RFID fields (PM4i with RFID option only)
Ranges for m1 are as follows:
Field Data, Define Source - m1 Ranges Listed by Printer
Printer Range for m1
3240 0 - 3550
3400 0 - 3550
3440 0 - 3550 (incl. 2D fields)
3600 0 - 3550
4100 0 - 250
4400 0 - 250
44X0 0 - 250
4X30 0 - 3550
7421, PC41 0 - 3550
EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, 0 - 3550
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, PX6i
EasyCoder PM4i (RFID) 0 - 3550

m2 is an optional positive integer numeric field offset. For all printers, the
range for m2 is 0 to 9999. Default is 0.
The syntax for this command is illustrated in these examples.
d0[,m1]
d1[,m1];
Enter optional data in Print mode. m1 is the maximum amount of data that
you can enter into this field. The default for m1 is 20 characters for bar
code fields, 30 characters for human-readable fields, and 64 characters for
RFID fields.
For variable RFID fields, make sure to allow for field separator commands.
Also, fields in hex format need at least twice as many characters as defined
in the RFID tap setup command. For example, to write 4 hex bytes to a tag,
you need to allow at least 8 characters in the variable data field.
d2,m1[,m2];

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 135

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Copy data into this field from field m1. You must define the field before
you can use it. m2 is an optional positive integer numeric field offset that
can range from 0 to 9999, with 0 as the default. You can only offset data
delimited by numeric field separator <FS> or alphanumeric field separator
<GS>. A bar code field cannot copy data from a human-readable field, but
a human-readable field can copy data from a bar code field. You can use up
to 19 slave fields in each format.
d3,m1;
Fixed data m1 is stored as part of the format, and you use it every time you
print the current field. You cannot change entered data with print
commands.
Many formats divide data into separate fields and then rearrange these
fields to fit the RFID tag or composite bar codes. Use the <HT> character
to divide the fields to enable you to enter the entire source data with one
command.
The following example shows how to separate the fields with <HT>:
<STX>Q3;a3,1;d3,0<HT>4011661<HT>0030000001;<ETX>
<STX><ESC>J3,1<ETX>

Field Direction, Define

Purpose: Defines the field rotation.
Syntax: fn
where n defines the rotation. For all printers, valid values for n are:
0 Horizontal
1 Rotated 90° counterclockwise from horizontal
2 Rotated 180° counterclockwise from horizontal
3 Rotated 270° counterclockwise from horizontal

Field Origin, Define

Purpose: Defines the origin for a field. The field origin is the upper left corner of the
field. Horizontal n and vertical m locations represent the number of dots
from the label’s origin. The origin (0,0) is the upper left square on the label.
Syntax: on,m
where:
n is the horizontal distance (in dots) from the label’s origin. For all
printers, the range for n is 0 to 19999. Default is 0.
m is the vertical distance (in dots) from the label’s origin. For all printers,
the range for m is 0 to 19999. Default is 0.

136 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Font Character Width, Define

Purpose: Defines the amount of space from the origin of one letter to the origin of
the next. If n is too small, characters may overlap. Use this command for
bitmap characters only.
Syntax: Zn
where n defines the font character width. For all printers, the default value
is the character’s bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus
the intercharacter space (zn). The next table lists ranges for n by printer.
Font Character Width, Define - Ranges for n Listed by Printer
Printer Values for n
3240 1 - 999
With expanded memory: 1 - 1999
3400 1 - 799
3400e 200 dpi: 1 - 799
400 dpi: 1 - 1599
3440 1 - 1599
3600 1 - 599
4100 1 - 599
With expanded memory: 1 - 799
4400 1 - 599
4420 1 - 799
4440 1 - 1599
4X30 1 - 599
7421, PC41 1 - 799
EasyCoder F4, 1 - 799
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: All printers ignore the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with
this command.

Font Type, Select

Purpose: Selects a font type for human-readable fields.
Syntax: cn[,m][,o]
where:
n is the font ID number. Values for n are described in the next table.
Default is 0.

Font Type, Select - Values for n

n Font Name n Font Name
0 7 x 9 Standard (86XX font) 38 24 point monospace standard
1 7 x 11 OCR (86XX font) 39 24 point monospace bold

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 137

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Font Type, Select - Values for n (continued)

n Font Name n Font Name
2 10 x 14 Standard (86XX font) 40 30 point monospace bold
3-6 User-defined fonts 41 36 point monospace bold
7 5 x 7 Standard (86XX font) 50 Kanji outline font
8 - 19 User-defined fonts 51 Kanji monospace outline font
20 8 point monospace 52 Katakana 12 x 16 bitmap
21 12 point monospace 53 Katakana 16 x 24 bitmap
22 20 point monospace 54 Katakana 24 x 36 bitmap
23 OCR A 55 Kanji 16 x 16 bitmap
24 OCR B size 2 56 Kanji 24 x 24 bitmap
25 Swiss Mono 721 standard 61 Swiss 721
outline font
26 Swiss Mono 721 bold outline 62 Swiss 721 bold
font
28 Dutch Roman 801 63 Swiss 721 bold condensed
proportional outline font
30 6 point monospace bold 64 Prestige bold
31 8 point monospace bold 65 Zurich extra condensed
32 10 point monospace standard 66 Dutch 801 bold
33 10 point monospace bold 67 Century Schoolbook
34 12 point monospace bold 68 Futura light
35 16 point monospace standard 69 Letter Gothic
36 16 point monospace bold 70 DingDings
37 20 point monospace bold

m (optional) is the intercharacter gap (the space between characters). For

all printers, the range for m is -199 to 199. If you do not specify m,
the printer uses the default value of the selected font.
o (optional) is the language for the field. If you do not specify the
language, the printer uses the default setting of the <SI>l command on
the PM/PF/PX printers.
Printers: The next table lists values for n supported by each printer.

Font Type, Select - Values for n Listed by Printer

Printer Valid values for n
3240 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41
50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3400A 0 to 24
3400B 0 to 25, 30 to 41,
50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3400C 0 to 25, 26, 28, 30 to 71
3400D 50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3400e 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41
50 to 56 with the Kanji option

138 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Font Type, Select - Values for n Listed by Printer (continued)

Printer Valid values for n
3440 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41
50 to 56 with the Kanji option
3600 0 to 25, 30 to 41
50 to 56 with the Kanji option
4100 0 to 24
4400 0 to 25
44X0 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41
50 to 56 with the Kanji option
4X30 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41
7421, PC41 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41
EasyCoder F4 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41
EasyCoder 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41, 61 to 70
PD41, PF2i,
PF4i, PM4i,
PX4i, PX6i

For more information about fonts, see the “Printer Language, Select”
command on page 118. For more information about designing and using
fonts, see Chapter 2, “Downloading Fonts to the Printer,” and Appendix C,
“Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts.”

Format, Create or Edit

Purpose: Edits or creates a format.
Syntax: An[,name] or Fn[,name]
where:
n is the format ID number. See the next table for the range for n listed
by printer. For certain printers, if you use an asterisk (*) for the label
format the printer does not store the label in permanent memory.
When you turn the printer off, it loses the format.
name (optional) is a name for the field of up to eight ASCII characters.
The name cannot start with a numeric character. See the next table
to learn which printers support name.

Format, Create or Edit - Values Listed by Printer

Printer Values for n Supports name?
3240 1 - 99 Yes
3400A 1 - 19 Yes
3400B
3400C *, 1 - 19 No
3400D
3400e *, 1 - 99 No
3440 *, 1 - 99 No

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 139

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Format, Create or Edit - Values Listed by Printer (continued)

Printer Values for n Supports name?
3600 1 - 19 Yes
4100 1 - 19 Yes
4400 1 - 19 Yes
44X0 *, 1 - 99 No
4X30 1 - 19 Yes
7421, PC41 *, 1 - 99 No
EasyCoder F4, *, 1 - 99 No
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: The printer generates an error code (36) if the format number is out of
range.

Format Direction in a Page, Define

Purpose: Defines the format directions within a page.
Syntax: qn
where n defines the format direction. For all printers, valid values for n are:
0 Horizontal
1 Rotated 90° counterclockwise from normal
2 Rotated 180° counterclockwise from normal
3 Rotated 270° counterclockwise from normal

Format, Erase
Purpose: Erases format ID number n.
Syntax: En
where n is the format ID number to erase. The next table lists ranges for n.
Format, Erase - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Values for n
3240 1 - 99
3400 1 - 19
3400e 1 - 99
3440 1 - 99
3600 1 - 19
4100 1 - 19
4400 1 - 19
44X0 1 - 99
4X30 1 - 19
7421, PC41 1 - 99
EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, 1 - 99
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

140 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Notes: You cannot erase format 0.

Format Offset Within a Page, Define

Purpose: Defines the format offsets within a page and creates new origins for fields
within a format by adding the format offsets to the original field offsets. m
and n represent increments of dot sizes.
Syntax: On,m
where:
n is an increment of dot sizes. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to
19999. Default is 0.
m is an increment of dot sizes. For all printers, the range for m is 0 to
19999. Default is 0.

Format Page Position, Define Data Source

See “Data Source for Format in a Page, Define” on page 134.

Format Position From Page, Delete

Purpose: Deletes the format position p from a page.
Syntax: mp
where p is the page position. For all printers, the range for p is a to z.
Default is a.

Format Position in a Page, Assign

Purpose: Assigns a specified format to a specific page position.
Syntax: Mp,n
where:
n is the numeric format ID. The range for n varies by printer as shown
in the next table.
Format Position in a Page, Assign - Values for n Listed by Printer
Printer Values for n
3240 0 - 19
3400 0 - 19
3400e 0 - 99
3440 0 - 99
3600 0 - 19
4100 0 - 19
4400 0 - 19
44X0 0 - 99
43X0 0 - 19
7421, PC41 0 - 99

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 141

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Format Position in a Page, Assign - Values for n Listed by Printer

Printer Values for n
EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, 0 - 99
PF4i, PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

p is the page position. For all printers, the range for p is a to z. Default is
a.
Notes: A format may be in multiple positions.
The printer generates an error code (36) if the format ID is out of range.

Graphic, Select
Purpose: Selects a graphic for graphic fields.
Syntax: cn
where n is the graphic field to select. For all printers, the range for n is 0 to
99. Default is 0.
Notes: This command applies to a graphic field only.

Graphic or UDC, Define

Purpose: Maps one column of bitmap for a graphic or a font character. n is the
column to be mapped.
Syntax: un,m...m
where:
n is the column to be mapped. The range for n varies by printer as
described in the next table:
Graphic or UDC, Define - Range for n Listed by Printer
Printer Values for n Notes
3240 1 - 999
With expanded memory: 1 - 1999
3400 1 - 799
3400e 200 dpi: 1 - 799
400 dpi: 1 - 1599
3440 1 - 1599
3600 1 - 599
4100 1 - 599
With expanded memory: 1 - 799
4400 1 - 599
44X0 4420: 1 - 799
4440: 1 - 1599
4X30 1 - 599 These printers do
not support
Emulation mode.

142 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Graphic or UDC, Define - Range for n Listed by Printer

Printer Values for n Notes
7421, PC41 1 - 799
EasyCoder F4, 1 - 799
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

m...m (Emulation mode only) is a string of 1s and 0s that make up the

column and specify whether or not to print in that row element of
the column (m = 1 prints, m = 0 does not). Any unmapped
columns or row elements default to 0. In Advanced mode, each
data byte m represents 6 bits of the bitmap.

Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define

Purpose: Defines box, bar code, or UDC height magnification. For bar code and box
fields, define the height n in number of dots.
Syntax: hn
where n is the magnification in number of dots. For all printers, defaults for
n are as follows:
Bar codes 50
Box fields 100
Graphics 1
POSTNET fields 2
Human-readable fields 2
The range for n varies by printer as described in the next table.
Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define -
Values Listed by Printer
Printer Bar codes Box fields Graphics POSTNET and HR fields
3240 1 - 1999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 400
3400A 1 - 1999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 400
3400B
3400C 3400D 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 999

3400e 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 999

3440 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 999
3600 1 - 1999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 400
4100 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 250
4400 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 250
44X0 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 999
4X30 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 250
7421 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 999
PC41

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 143

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define -

Values Listed by Printer (continued)
Printer Bar codes Box fields Graphics POSTNET and HR fields
EasyCoder F4, 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 999
PD41, PF2i,PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: For human-readable fields, graphics, and the POSTNET symbology, n

represents the vertical magnification of the character bitmap.
If you set n to a number that is too large, the printer uses the highest value
it can support.
In Advanced Mode, a dot is 5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a
400 dpi printer. For the 4X30 and 300 dpi (PD/PM/PX-series) printers, a
dot is 3.3 mil.

Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Edits or creates a human-readable field.
Syntax: Hn[,name]
where:
n is the field number of the field. For all printers, the range for n is 0
to 199. Default is 0.
name (optional) is a name for the field of up to eight ASCII characters
(not counting the following semicolon). You cannot start the name
with a number.
Notes: The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table.
Human-Readable Default Parameters
Parameter Syntax Default
Field origin o 0,0
Field direction f 0 degrees
Character rotation r 0 degrees
Font c 7 x 9 standard
Height magnification h 2
Width magnification w 2
Pitch g Disabled
Point k Disabled
Border b Disabled
Data origin d Print mode
Data length 30

144 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define

Purpose: Defines the amount of space added to the default intercharacter gap length
for a bitmap font. The number of dots you select for n define the
intercharacter gap length.
Syntax: zn
where n is the amount of space to add in dots. For all printers, the range for
n is 0 to 199. Default is 2.
Notes: The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character
width command (Zn).
The printer generates an error code (52) for invalid lengths.
The unit for n is in number of dots per pixels. In Advanced Mode, a dot is
5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a 400 dpi printer. For the 4X30
printers, a dot is 3.3 mil.

Interpretive Field, Edit

Purpose: Edits an interpretive field.
Syntax: In
where n is the field ID number of the bar code field to be interpreted. For
all printers, the range for n is 0 to 199. Default is 0.
Notes: You cannot create interpretive fields with this command; you can only
create or delete them when enabling the interpretive of the corresponding
bar code field. The parameters for the default field are as follows:
Interpretive Field Default Parameters
Parameter Syntax Default
Field origin o 2 dots below bar code, left justified
Field direction f 0 degrees
Character rotation r 0 degrees
Font c 7 x 9 standard
Height magnification h 2
Width magnification w 2
Pitch g Disabled
Point k Disabled
Border b Disabled
Data origin d Print mode
Data length 30

Each interpretive field is counted as an individual field in the maximum

number of 200 fields (0 – 199).

Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Determines if the interpretive field of the current bar code field prints.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 145

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Syntax: in
where n enables or disables printing. For all printers, valid values for n are:
0 Disable printing.
1 Enable with start and stop characters.
2 Enable without start or stop characters.
Notes: When you enable the interpretive field, the human-readable information in
the default font (font 0, 7 x 9 standard) prints 2 dots below the bar code
field and is left justified.
Use the I command to edit an interpretive field.

Length of Line or Box Field, Define

Purpose: Defines the length of a line or box in number of dots.
Syntax: ln
where n is the length in dots. For all printers, the range for n is 1 to 1999.
Default is 100.
Notes: In Advanced Mode, a dot is 5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a
400 dpi printer. For the 4X30 printers, a dot is 3.3 mil.

Line Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Accesses or creates a line field.
Syntax: Ln[,name]
where:
n is the field number of the field. For all printers, the range for n is 0
to 199. Default is 0.
name (optional) is a name for the field of up to eight ASCII characters
(not counting the following semicolon).
Notes: The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table.

Line Field Default Parameters

Parameter Syntax Default
Field origin o 0,0
Field direction f 0 degrees
Line length l 100
Line width w 1

Outline Font, Clear or Create

Purpose: Clears or creates an outline font or graphic.
The 4100 printer does not support this command unless additional RAM is
installed.

146 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Syntax: Jn[,name][,type][,size]
where:
n is the font or graphic ID. See the next table for ranges for n listed by
printer.
name is a string of up to eight ASCII characters (not counting the
semicolon) that provides a name for the font or graphic.
type is the type of the font. See the next table for values for type listed by
printer.
size defines the size of a TrueType font and is only needed for
double-byte fonts that exceed 512K bytes.

Outline Font, Clear or Create - Values Listed by Printer

Printer Values for n Values for type
3240 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font
3400A 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font
3400B
3400C 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font (default)
2 = Double-byte bitmap font
3400e 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font (default)
1 = TrueType font
2 = Double-byte bitmap font
3440 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font (default)
1 = TrueType font
2 = Double-byte bitmap font
3600 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font
4100 Not available Not available
4400 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font
44X0 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font (default)
1 = TrueType font
2 = Double-byte bitmap font
4X30 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font (default)
7421, PC41 3 to 6, 8 to 19 0 = Speedo font (default)
2 = Double-byte bitmap font
EasyCoder F4, 3 to 6, 8 to 19 1 = TrueType font
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: If you have already defined font set n, the printer erases all previous
characters in the font.

Outline Font, Download

Purpose: Downloads outline font descriptions.
Syntax: jnn....nn
where n is the information that describes all characters within the font.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 147

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

You must send the font information to the printer as a string of ASCII
characters in hexadecimal form. The printer expects two hex digit bytes for
every 8-bit byte of information. Data must be ASCII characters, ranging
from 0 to 9 and A to F. All characters are loaded at once, not individually as
with bitmap fonts. The description for the whole font can be thousands of
characters long; however, the maximum message length is only 255.
Therefore, the font description may have to be split between successive j
commands.
Notes: The printer stores the incoming font description in the font you select with
the J command.
See Chapter 2 for more information about downloading fonts.

Page, Create or Edit

Purpose: Edits or creates a page.
Syntax: Sn
where n is the numeric page ID. For all printers, the range for n is 1 to 9.
Notes: You cannot edit the default page (page 0).
The printer generates an error code (26) if a page number is out of range.
The following example illustrates the Page, Create or Edit command:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o1000,100;f3;b10;c0;h3;w2;d0,35<ETX>
<STX>H1;o300,250;c0;f3;h3;w3;<ETX>
<STX>B2;o250,100;c0;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX>
<STX>W3;o25,50;l300;h600;w5;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E2;F2;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o800,250;c0;f3;h3;w3;<ETX>
<STX>B1;o750,100;c0;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX>
<STX>W2;o525,50;l300;h600;w5;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>S1;Ma,1;O0,0;Mb,2;O0,0<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>G1<CAN><ETX>
<STX><ESC>Ea<ETX>
<STX>Example using the page command<CR><ETX>
<STX>Format 1<CR><ETX>
<STX>Format1<STX>
<STX><ESC>Eb<ETX>
<STX>Format 2<CR><ETX>
<STX>Format2<STX>
<STX><US>1<ETX>
<STX><RS>1<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>
<STX><ESC>G0<ETX>

148 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Page, Delete
Purpose: Deletes a page.
Syntax: sn
where n is the numeric page ID. For all printers, the range for n is 1 to 9.
Notes: You cannot delete the default page (page 0).

Pitch Size, Set

Purpose: Sets the pitch size that defines the size of the characters in human-readable
fields. Use this command to scale outline fonts smoothly.
This command is not supported by the EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, and PX6i printers.
Syntax: gn
where n is the pitch size. For supported printers, the range for n is 1 to 50.
Default is 12.
Notes: You can only use this command in Advanced mode. When you use the
pitch size command, you disable the height and width magnification and
point.

Point Size, Set

Purpose: Sets the point size that defines the size of the characters in human-readable
fields. You can only use this command in Advanced mode.
Syntax: kn
where n sets the point size. For all printers, default is 12. The next table
shows ranges for n listed by printer.
Printers:
Point Size, Set - Values Listed by Printer
Printer Values for n Notes
3240 4 - 180 This command works most effectively on fonts c25, c26,
and c27.
3400 4 - 288 This command works most effectively on outline fonts.
3400e 200 dpi: 3 - 288 This command works most effectively on outline fonts.
400 dpi: 3 - 255
3440 3 - 255 This command works most effectively on fonts c25, c26,
and c27.
3600 4 - 288 This command works most effectively on font c25.
4100 4 - 212 This command works most effectively on fonts c20, c21,
and c22.
4400 4 - 212 This command works most effectively on fonts c20, c21,
c22, and c25.
44X0 4420: 3 - 288 This command works most effectively on outline fonts.
4440: 3 - 255

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 149

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Point Size, Set - Values Listed by Printer

Printer Values for n Notes
4X30 4 - 212 This command works most effectively on fonts c20, c21,
c22, and c25.
7421, PC41 3 - 288 This command works most effectively on outline fonts.
EasyCoder 4 - 288 This command works most effectively on outline fonts.
F4, PD41,
PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i,
PX6i

Notes: A point size equals 1/72 inch. A higher point size means larger characters.

Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set

Syntax: vn
Notes: This is a null command and the printer ignores it.

Program Mode, Exit

Purpose: Instructs the printer to exit Program mode and enter Print mode. It saves
any format or page currently being edited.
Syntax: R

RFID Tag Field Setup

Purpose: Defines an RFID tag field for the write command. This command is
supported only by the PM4i with the RFID option.
Syntax: an,m,p,q
where:
n specifies the format number of a tag format for the source data. Valid
values for n are 0 to 18. Default is 1.
m specifies a tag segment from which data is read or to which data is
written. Valid values for m are:
1 ID (default)
2 Data
3 All
10 RESERVED (EPCglobal Gen2 tags only)
11 EPC (EPCglobal Gen2 tags only)
12 TID (EPCglobal Gen2 tags only)
13 USER (EPCglobal Gen2 tags only)
p specifies the first byte of the declared segment (m) on the aligned tag
to which data is written. Values for p vary by RFID tag type. The first
byte of a segment is always 0, regardless of the segment’s physical
location on the tag. Default is 0.

150 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

q specifies how many bytes on the tag are reserved for the data to be
written, starting at the position stated by the start of field data
command. Values for q vary by RFID tag type. The length of field
data may differ, depending on the segment and tag air interface ISO
standard. Default is 8.
Notes: This command specifies how data is stored on the tag. Use the next table to
match the format number with the format name.

Tag Format Field Parameters

Format Number Format Name Format Number Format Name
0 NUM 10 SGLN-96
1 HEX 11 SGLN-64
2 ASCII 12 GRAI-96
3 SSCC-96 13 GRAI-64
4 SSCC-64 14 GIAI-96
5 SGTIN-96 15 GIAI-64
6 SGTIN-64 16 GID-96
7 EPC-URN 17 USDOD-96
8 EPC-HEX96 18 USDOD-64
9 EPC-HEX64

The next table provides examples of how choosing the NUM, HEX, or
ASCII formats affects how data is stored on the tag. The Data column
shows the original field data. Depending on the format (NUM, HEX,
ASCII) you choose, the appropriate column shows you the data (in hex)
that is stored on the tag.
Tag Format, Example of NUM, HEX, ASCII
Data NUM HEX ASCII
ABCD Not applicable since the AB,CD 41,42,43,44
data is not numeric.
1234 00,00,04,D2 12,34 31,32,33,34
Hex equivalent of the
number 1234.
ABC Not applicable since the Not applicable since the data 42,42,43
data is not numeric. does not contain an even
number of digits (pairs)
RFID Not applicable since the Not applicable since the data 52,46,49,44
data is not numeric. is not in hex.
257 00,00,01,01 Not applicable since the data 32,35,37
does not contain an even
number of digits (pairs)

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 151

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Tag Format Details and Descriptions

Tag Format Details Description
SSCC-96 Filter Value: SSCC is intended for assignment to individual objects and does not
Numeric, 0-7 require any additional fields to serve as an EPC pure identity. Size
Company Prefix: of segment is 12 bytes.
Numeric, 6-12 digits Company Prefix + Serial Reference = 17 digits
Serial Reference: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 11-5 digits ”d3,filter<HT>company prefix<HT>serial reference;”
SSCC-64 Filter Value: Same description as SSCC-96 except that the size of segment is 8
Numeric, 0-7 bytes.
Company Prefix: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 0-16 383 ”d3,filter<HT>company prefix index<HT>serial
Serial Reference: reference;”
Numeric, 0-99 999 999 999
SGTIN-96 Filter Value: A GTIN by itself does not fit the definition of an EPC pure
Numeric, 0-7 identity, because it does not uniquely identify a single physical
Company Prefix: object. Instead, a GTIN identifies a particular class of object, such
Numeric, 6-12 digits as a particular kind of product. To create a unique identifier for
individual objects, the GTIN is augmented with a serial number,
Item Reference: which the managing entity is responsible for assigning uniquely to
Numeric, 7-1 digits individual object classes. The combination of GTIN and a unique
Serial Number: serial number is called a Serialized GTIN (SGTIN). Size of
Numeric, 0-274 877 906 943 segment is 12 bytes.
Company prefix + item reference = 13 digits
Example for a fixed data field:
”d3,filter<HT>company prefix<HT>item
reference<HT>serial number;”
SGTIN-64 Filter Value: Same description as SGTIN-96 except that the tag holds 8 bytes.
Numeric, 0-7 Example for a fixed data field:
Company Prefix: ”d3,filter<HT>company prefix index<HT>item
Numeric, 0-16 383 reference<HT>serial number;”
Item Reference:
Numeric, 0-1 048 575
Serial Number:
Numeric, 0-33 554 431
EPC-URN URN string A standardized format for writing data to a tag. URI forms are
For EPCglobal tag formats, the provided for pure identities, which contain just the EPC fields that
pure identity URI representation is serve to distinguish one object from another. These URIs take the
as follows: form of Uniform Resource Names (URNs), with a different URN
urn:epc:tag:epc-format: namespace allocated for each pure identity type.
parameter 1.parameter Example for fixed data field:
2.parameter 3 ”d3,urn:epc:tag:sscc-96:0.12345678.987654321;”
EPC-HEX96 Hex string (0-9, a-f, A-F) Hex representation of the complete memory area on a 12 byte tag.
Example for fixed data field:
”d3,0102030405060708090A0B0C;”
EPC-HEX64 Hex string (0-9, a-f, A-F) Hex representation of the complete memory area of the tag holds 8
bytes of data.

152 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Tag Format Details and Descriptions (continued)

Tag Format Details Description
SGLN-96 Filter Value: A SGLN can represent either a discrete, unique physical location
Numeric, 0-7 such as a dock door or a warehouse slot, an aggregate physical
Company Prefix: location such as an entire warehouse, or a logical entity such as an
Numeric, 6-12 digits organization that performs a business function such as placing an
order. The serial number, that makes it a SGLN, should not be
Location Reference:
used until specified by the EAN.UCC general specifications. The
Numeric, 6-0 digits
tag holds 12 bytes of data.
Serial Number:
Company prefix + location reference = 12 digits
Numeric, 0-2 199 023 255 551
Example for a fixed data field:
”d3,filter<HT>company prefix index<HT> location
reference<HT>serial number;”
SGLN-64 Filter Value: Same description as SGLN-96 except that the tag holds 8 bytes of
Numeric, 0- 7 data.
Company Prefix Index: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 0-16 383 ”d3,filter<HT>company prefix index<HT> location
Location Reference: reference<HT>serial number;”
Numeric, 0-999 999
Serial Number:
Numeric, 0-524 287
GRAI-96 Filter Value: GRAI is intended for assignment to individual objects and
Numeric, 0-7 therefore does not require any additional fields to serve as an EPC
Company Prefix: pure identity. Holds 12 bytes of data.
Numeric, 6-12 digits Company prefix + asset type = 12 digits
Asset Type: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 6-0 digits “d3,filter<HT>company prefix<HT>asset type<HT>serial
Serial Number: number;”
Numeric, 0-274 877 906 943
GRAI-64 Filter Value: Same description as GRAI-96 except that the tag holds 8 bytes of
Numeric, 0-7 data.
Company Prefix Index: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 0-16 383 ”d3,filter<HT>company prefix index<HT>asset
Asset Type: type<HT>serial number;”
Numeric, 0-999 999
Serial Number:
Numeric, 0-524 287
GIAI-96 Filter Value: Intended for assignment to individual objects and therefore does
Numeric, 0-7 not require any additional fields to serve as an EPC pure identity.
Company Prefix: The tag can store 12 bytes of data.
Numeric, 6-12 digits Company prefix + Individual asset reference = 24 digits
Individual Asset Reference: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 18-12 digits ”d3,filter<HT>company prefix<HT>individual asset
reference;”
GIAI-64 Filter Value: Same description as GIAI-96 except that the tag holds 8 bytes of
Numeric, 0-7 data.
Company Prefix Index: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 0-16 383 ”d3,filter<HT>company prefix index<HT>
Individual Asset Reference: individual asset reference;”
Numeric, 0-549 755 813 887

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 153

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Tag Format Details and Descriptions (continued)

Tag Format Details Description
GID-96 General Manager Number: Independent of any known, existing specifications or identity
Numeric, 0-268 435 455 schemes, 12 byte General Identifier.
Object Class: Example for a fixed data field:
Numeric, 0-16 777 215 “d3,general manager number<HT>object class<HT>serial
Serial Number: number;”
Numeric, 0-68 719 476 735
USDOD-96 Filter Value: The Department of Defense has constructed a tag format with
Numeric, 0-15 header, filter, government managed identifier (supplier), and serial
Government Managed Identifier: number. The tag can store 12 bytes of data.
Always 5 characters. 8 bit ASCII, Example of a fixed data field:
0-9, SPACE and A-Z except I and ”d3,filter<HT>government managed identifier
O allowed <HT>serial number;”
Serial Number:
Numeric, 0-68 719 476 735
USDOD-64 Filter Value: Same description as USDOD-96 except that the tag holds 8 bytes
Numeric, 0-3 of data
Government Managed Identifier: Example of a fixed data field:
Always 5 characters, 0-9, SPACE ”d3,filter<HT>government managed identifier <HT>serial
and A-Z except I and O allowed number;”
Serial Number:
Numeric, 0-16 777 215

154 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

RFID Tag Protect

Purpose: Marks whether or not the data that is defined by the RFID field is
permanently protected. If the data is protected, another RFID device
cannot overwrite it. This command is supported only by the PM4i with the
RFID option.
Syntax: nn
where n enables or disables write protection. Valid values for n are:
0 No write protection.
1 Field is write protected.

RFID Tag Write Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Edits or creates a field that allows for setting up data to write to an RFID
tag. Note that if a program mode command parameter is left out, the
default value applies. Temporary format settings are lost at reboot.
This command is supported only by the PM4i with the RFID option.
Syntax: Qn
where n is the field ID number. Valid values for n are 0 to 199. Default is 0.
Notes: The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table.

RFID Tag Write Field Default Parameters

Parameter Syntax Default
RFID tag field setup a 1,1,0,8
Field data, define source (write operations only) d 0,30,0
RFID tag protect n 0

If the tag write fails, an error status of <EOT> is set. If the write succeeds, a
status of <ACK> is set. If auto-transmit level 3 is enabled, an <EOT> status
response is returned to the host upon error and an <ACK> upon success.

User-Defined Character, Clear or Create

Purpose: Clears or creates a graphic bitmap.
Syntax: Gn[,name]
where:
n is the graphic ID.
name is a name for the UDC of up to eight ASCII characters (not
counting the semicolon). The name cannot start with a number.
Notes: If you have already defined graphic n, the printer erases it and redefines it.

User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Edits or creates a graphic field.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 155

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Syntax: Un[,name]
where:
n is the field ID. Valid values for n are 0 to 199. Default is 0.
name is a name for the UDC of up to eight ASCII characters (not
counting the semicolon). The name cannot start with a number.
Notes: The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table.
Parameters for the Default Field
Parameter Syntax Default
Field origin o 0,0
Field direction f 0 degrees
Character rotation r 0 degrees
Height magnification h 1
Width magnification w 1

User-Defined Font Character, Create

Purpose: Specifies which font character you will define next.
Syntax: tn
where n is the decimal representation of the character to define. For all
printers, the range for n is 0 to 255. The printer erases existing characters.

Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define

Purpose: Defines the width magnification of a line, box, bar code, or character. You
define the width of line, box, or bar code fields by the number of dots that
you specify for n. For human-readable fields, graphics and the POSTNET
symbology, n is the magnification of the character width.
Syntax: wn
where n defines the width magnification in number of dots. For all printers,
default values for n are:
Line width 1
Box width 1
Bar code field 1
Graphics 1
Human-readable fields 2
POSTNET 2
See the next table for ranges for n listed by printer.
Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define - Values Listed By
Printer
Line and Bar code POSTNET and
Printer box fields fields Graphics HR fields
3240 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 400 1 - 250

156 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define - Values Listed By

Printer (continued)
Line and Bar code POSTNET and
Printer box fields fields Graphics HR fields
3400A 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 400 1 - 250
3400B
3400C 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 999 1 - 999
3400D
3400e 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 999 1 - 999
3440 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 999 1 - 999
3600 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 400 1 - 250
4100 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 250
4400 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 250
44X0 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 999 1 - 999
4X30 1 - 9999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 250
7421, PC41 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 999 1 - 999
EasyCoder F4, 1 - 9999 1 - 99 1 - 999 1 - 999
PD41, PF2i, PF4i,
PM4i, PX4i, PX6i

Notes: In Advanced Mode, a dot is 5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a
400 dpi printer. For the 4x30 and 300 dpi (PD/PM/PX-series) printers, a
dot is 3.3 mil.

Test and Service Commands

You can use Test and Service commands to query the printer for hardware
diagnostic information. Test and Service commands are effective when the
printer is in Test and Service mode. You can switch the printer to Test and
Service mode with this command:
<ESC>T
For help downloading Test and Service commands to the printer, see
“Sending IPL Commands to the Printer” on page 5.

Note: All commands in Test and Service mode end with the command
terminator (;), except the last command in a message.

12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmit the 12 volt supply A/D output back to the host. The range of the
value is 00 to 255.
This command is supported only by the 4400.
Syntax: U

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 157

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Ambient Temperature, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the ambient temperature sensor A/D output back to the host.
The value ranges from 00 to 255.
This command is supported only by the 4400.
Syntax: A

Command Terminator
Purpose: All commands in Test and Service mode must end with the command
terminator except for the last command in a message.
Syntax: ;

Dark Adjust
Purpose: This command changes the darkness of the print on your labels. It is for
fine-tuning only.
This command is supported only by the 3440.
Syntax: K

Factory Defaults, Reset

Purpose: Sets the printer configuration to the factory defaults. When you exit Test
and Service mode after sending this command, the printer performs a warm
boot (it resets).
Syntax: D
Use this example to reset the factory defaults:
<STX><ESC>T;D;R;<ETX>

Formats, Print
Purpose: Prints all stored formats.
Syntax: f

Hardware Configuration Label, Print

Purpose: Prints a label that provides information about the printer’s hardware
configuration.
Syntax: h

Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the paper path open switch value back to the host. A value of 0
indicates the paper path is open, and a value of 1 indicates it is closed. On
the EasyCoder F4 and PD/PF/PM/PX-series printers, a value of 1 indicates
the paper path is open, and a value of 0 indicates it is closed.
This command is not supported by the 3400A, 3400B, and 3600 printers.

158 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Syntax: L

Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the label taken sensor A/D output back to the host. The value
can range from 00 to 255. On the EasyCoder F4 and PD/PF/PM/PX-series
printers, a value of 0 indicates the label is removed, and a value of 1
indicates the label is at the strip pin.
Syntax: T

Pages, Print
Purpose: Prints the pages stored on the printer.
Syntax: p

Pitch Label, Print

Purpose: Prints the pitch label.
Syntax: C

Print Quality Label, Print

Purpose: Prints the print quality program and model number label.
Syntax: Q

Printhead Resistance Test, Begin

Purpose: Starts the printhead resistance test. The printer will respond with the ASCII
character string “pass” or “fail.” This command is supported only by the
4400.
Syntax: B

Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit

Purpose: Sends the average, maximum, and minimum printhead dot resistance value
to the host. Each value is a numeric data string, separated by comma. This
command is supported only by the 4400.
Syntax: S

Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: This command transmits the printhead thermistor A/D output back to the
host. The range of the value is 00 to 255.
Syntax: P

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 159

Chapter 7 — IPL Command Reference

Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the printhead volt supply A/D output back to the host. The
range of the value is 00 to 255. This command is supported only by the
4400.
Syntax: V

Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the label mark reflective sensor A/D output back to the host. The
value ranges from 00 to 255.
The EasyCoder F4 and PD/PF/PM/PX-series printers will not respond if
the paper is moving. For these printers, the values are 0 (label) or 1 (mark).
Syntax: M

Software Configuration Label, Print

Purpose: Prints a label providing software configuration information.
Syntax: s

Test and Service Mode, Exit

Purpose: Causes the printer to exit Test and Service mode.
Syntax: R

Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the label gap transmissive sensor A/D output back to the host.
The value ranges from 00 to 255.
The EasyCoder F4 and PD/PF/PM/PX-series printers will not respond if
the paper is moving. For these printers, values are 0 (gap) or 1 (label).
Syntax: G

User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print

Purpose: Prints the user-defined characters and graphics stored on the printer.
Syntax: g

User-Defined Fonts, Print

Purpose: Prints the user-defined fonts stored on the printer.
Syntax: t

160 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 A Full ASCII Table

This appendix contains the full ASCII chart. For each ASCII character, it
also provides its binary, hexadecimal, and Code 39 equivalent. This
appendix also contains an ASCII control character chart and provides an
explanation for each control character.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 161

Appendix A — Full ASCII Table

Full ASCII Table

Binary0 Hex1 Decimal Code 39 ASCII2 Binary0 Hex1 Decimal Code 39 ASCII2
00000000 00 00 %U NUL 00100011 23 35 /C #
00000001 01 01 $A SOH 00100100 24 36 /D $
00000010 02 02 $B STX 00100101 25 37 /E %
00000011 03 03 $C ETX 00100110 26 38 /F &
00000100 04 04 $D EOT 00100111 27 39 /G '
00000101 05 05 $E ENQ 00101000 28 40 /H (
00000110 06 06 $F ACK 00101001 29 41 /I )
00000111 07 07 $G BEL 00101010 2A 42 /J *
00001000 08 08 $H BS 00101011 2B 43 /K +
00001001 09 09 $I HT 00101100 2C 44 /L ,
00001010 0A 10 $J LF 00101101 2D 45 /M -
00001011 0B 11 $K VT 00101110 2E 46 /N .
00001100 0C 12 $L FF 00101111 2F 47 /O /
00001101 0D 13 $M CR 00110000 30 48 /P4 0
00001110 0E 14 $N SO 00110001 31 49 /Q 1
00001111 0F 15 $O SI 00110010 32 50 /R 2
00010000 10 16 $P DLE 00110011 33 51 /S 3
00010001 11 17 $Q DC1 00110100 34 52 /T 4
00010010 12 18 $R DC2 00110101 35 53 /U 5
00010011 13 19 $S DC3 00110110 36 54 /V 6
00010100 14 20 $T DC4 00110111 37 55 /W 7
00010101 15 21 $U NAK 00111000 38 56 /X 8
00010110 16 22 $V SYN 00111001 39 57 /Y 9
00010111 17 23 $W ETB 00111010 3A 58 /Z :
00011000 18 24 $X CAN 00111011 3B 59 %F ;
00011001 19 25 $Y EM 00111100 3C 60 %G <
00011010 1A 26 $Z SUB 00111101 3D 61 %H =
00011011 1B 27 %A ESC 00111110 3E 62 %I >
00011100 1C 28 %B FS 00111111 3F 63 %J ?
00011101 1D 29 %C GS 01000000 40 64 %V @
00011110 1E 30 %D RS 01000001 41 65 A A
00011111 1F 31 %E US 01000010 42 66 B B
00100000 20 32 SP SP3 01000011 43 67 C C
00100001 21 33 /A ! 01000100 44 68 D D
00100010 22 34 /B " 01000101 45 69 E E

162 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix A — Full ASCII Table

Full ASCII Table (continued)

Binary0 Hex1 Decimal Code 39 ASCII2 Binary0 Hex1 Decimal Code 39 ASCII2
01000110 46 70 F F 01100011 63 99 +C c
01000111 47 71 G G 01100100 64 100 +D d
01001000 48 72 H H 01100101 65 101 +E e
01001001 49 73 I I 01100110 66 102 +F f
01001010 4A 74 J J 01100111 67 103 +G g
01001011 4B 75 K K 01101000 68 104 +H h
01001100 4C 76 L L 01101001 69 105 +I i
01001101 4D 77 M M 01101010 6A 106 +J j
01001110 4E 78 N N 01101011 6B 107 +K k
01001111 4F 79 O O 01101100 6C 108 +L l
01010000 50 80 P P 01101101 6D 109 +M m
01010001 51 81 Q Q 01101110 6E 110 +N n
01010010 52 82 R R 01101111 6F 111 +O o
01010011 53 83 S S 01110000 70 112 +P p
01010100 54 84 T T 01110001 71 113 +Q q
01010101 55 85 U U 01110010 72 114 +R r
01010110 56 86 V V 01110011 73 115 +S s
01010111 57 87 W W 01110100 74 116 +T t
01011000 58 88 X X 01110101 75 117 +U u
01011001 59 89 Y Y 01110110 76 118 +V v
01011010 5A 90 Z Z 01110111 77 119 +W w
01011011 5B 91 %K [ 01111000 78 120 +X x
01011100 5C 92 %L \ 01111001 79 121 +Y y
01011101 5D 93 %M ] 01111010 7A 122 +Z z
01011110 5E 94 %N ^ 01111011 7B 123 %P {
01011111 5F 95 %O _ 01111100 7C 124 %Q |
01100000 60 96 %W ` 01111101 7D 125 %R }
01100001 61 97 +A a 01111110 7E 126 %S ~
01100010 62 98 +B b 01111111 7F 127 %T5 n6

Notes:
0 Bit positions are 76543210.
1 Hexadecimal value
2 ASCII character
3 SP is the SPACE character.
4 The Code 39 characters /P through /Y may be interchanged with the numbers 0 through 9.
5 May be interchanged with %X or %Y or %Z.
6 n is the DELETE character.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 163

Appendix A — Full ASCII Table

Full ASCII Control Characters Table

Control Character Definition Control Character Definition
NUL Null, or all zeroes DC1 Device Control 1 (XON)
SOH Start of Heading DC2 Device Control 2
STX Start of Text DC3 Device Control 3 (XOFF)
ETX End of Text DC4 Device Control
EOT End of Transmission NAK Negative Acknowledge
ENQ Enquiry SYN Synchronous Idle
ACK Acknowledgment ETB End Transmission Block
BEL Bell CAN Cancel
BS Backspace EM End of Medium
HT Horizontal Tab SUB Substitute
LF Line Feed ESC Escape
VT Vertical Tab FS File Separator
FF Form Feed GS Group Separator
CR Carriage Return RS Record Separator
SO Shift Out US Unit Separator
SI Shift In SP Space
DLE Data Link Escape DEL Delete

164 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 B Character Sets

This appendix contains the extended character set substitution tables

available on your printer.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 165

Appendix B — Character Sets

International Character Sets

The following tables show which hex codes to download for international
characters not available in the U.S. character set. To use the tables, find the
hex code for the U.S. character that corresponds with the character in your
language.

Advanced Character Table

If you are running your printer in Advanced mode, use this table to find the
right hex codes for the international character sets.

23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E
U.S. ASCII # $ @ [ \ ] ^ ` { ¦ } ~
U.K. ASCII £ $ @ [ \ ] ^ ` { ¦ } -
Germany # $ § Ä Ö Ü ^ ` ä ö ü ß
France £ $ à ° ç § ^ ` é ù è ¨
Norway/Denmark # $ @ Æ Ø Å ^ ` æ ø å -
Sweden/Finland # ¤ É Ä Ö Å Ü é ä ö å ü
Spain £ $ § ¡ Ñ ¿ ^ ` ° ñ ç ~
Switzerland # $ à ° ç é ^ ù ä ö ü è
Italy £ $ § ° ç é ^ ù à ò è ì

8636/46 Character Table

This table shows the hex codes for the character sets that print if your
printer is running under 86XX emulation mode.

23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E
U.S. ASCII # $ @ [ \ ] ^ ` { ¦ } ~
U.K. ASCII £ $ @ [ \ ] ^ ` { ¦ } ~
Germany # $ § Ä Ö Ü ^ ` ä ö ü ß
France £ $ à ° ç § ^ ` é ù è ¨
Norway/Denmark # $ @ Æ Ø Å ^ ` æ ø å ~
Sweden/Finland # ¤ É Ä Ö Å Ü é ä ö å ü
Spain Pt $ @ ¡ Ñ ¿ ^ ` ¨ ñ ç ~
Switzerland # $ à ° ç é ^ ù ä ö ü è
Italy # $ § ° ç é ^ ù à ò è ì

166 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix B — Character Sets

IBM Translation Character Table

This table shows the hex codes for the international character sets that print
if your printer is running with Translation enabled.

21 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E
U.S. ASCII ¦ # $ @ ¢ \ ! ÿ ` { ¦ } ~
U.K. ASCII ¦ # £ @ $ \ ! ÿ ` { ¦ } -
Germany ! # $ § Ä Ö Ü ^ ` ä ö ü ß
France ! £ $ à ° ç § ^ ` é ù è ¨
Norway/Denmark ! Æ Å Ø # \ ¤ ^ ` æ ø å ü
Sweden/Finland ! Ä Å Ö § É ¤ ^ é ä ö å ü
Spain ¦ Ñ Pt @ [ \ ] ÿ ` { ñ } ¨
Switzerland ! # $ à ° ç é ^ ù ä ö ü è
Italy ! £ $ § ° ç é ^ ù à ò è ì

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 167

Appendix B — Character Sets

Code Page 850 Character Table

This table shows the character set that prints if your printer has Code Page
850 selected as the printer language.
Note: Some Intermec printers do not support Code Page 850. For more
information, see the “Printer Language, Select” command on page 118.

♥ ♣
♥
♦
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F

➝
➝

➝
▲
➝
▲
¶ § ➝ ➝

➝
➝ ▼

➝
▲

➝
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F
∗
! # $ & ' ( ) + , - .
20 21
"
22 23 24
%
25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] -
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

` a b
62
c
63
d e
6465
f66 g67 h
68
i
69
j
6A
k
6B
l m
6C6D
n6E o6F
60 61

p q r s t u v w x y z { } ˜
70 71 72 73 74 75 D6 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë è Å
Ä 8F
80 81 82 83 84 85 E6 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E

É æ Æ ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ø £ Ø X ƒ
90 91 92 93 94 95 F6 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F

á í ó ú ñ Ñ a o ¿ ® ¬ 1/
2
1/
4 i
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF
©
Á Â ÁB7 ¢ ¥ ¬
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF

ã Ã
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF

D ÊD2 ËD3 ÈD4 D5

Í
D6
Î
D7
Ï
D8 D9 DA DB DC DD
Ì DE DF
D0 D1

Ó ß Ô Ò õ Õ µ ρ ρ Ú Û Ù y´ ´ -
Y ´
E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF
3 ¶ § ÷
-F0 F1 F2
4
F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA
1
FB
3
FC
2
FD FE FF

IPL019.eps

168 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix B — Character Sets

Extended Character Sets

Each internal font in the printer has a different character set associated with
it as shown in the following tables. The hex codes accompany each
character. You must set the serial port communication to 8 data bits to use the
extended character sets.
Characters in Fonts
c0 7x9 Standard
c1 7x11 OCR
c2 10x14 Standard
c7 5x7 Standard

ØØ Ø1 Ø2 Ø3 Ø4 Ø5 Ø6 Ø7 Ø8 Ø9 ØA ØB ØC ØD ØE ØF

1Ø 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

2Ø 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

3Ø 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

4Ø 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

5Ø 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

6Ø 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

7Ø 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

8Ø 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F

9Ø 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F

AØ A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF

BØ B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF

CØ C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF

DØ D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF

EØ E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF

FØ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
IPL020.eps

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 169

Appendix B — Character Sets

Characters in Fonts
c20 8 point
c21 12 point
c22 20 ;p

ØØ Ø1 Ø2 Ø3 Ø4 Ø5 Ø6 Ø7 Ø8 Ø9 ØA ØB ØC ØD ØE ØE

1Ø 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

! " # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /
2Ø 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
3Ø 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
4Ø 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] _
5Ø 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
6Ø 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

p q r s t u v w x y z { } ∼
7Ø 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

8Ø 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F

9Ø 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F

¡ ¢ | § © a ® -
£ ¤ ¥ | ¨ « ¬ -
AØ A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF

±
2 3
´ µ ¶ . Ç 1 0
» 1
4
1
2
3
4
¿
BØ B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF

À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
CØ C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF

D Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Y´ I ß
DØ D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D8 DA DB DC DD DE DF

à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
EØ E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF

o~ ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü y´ Io ÿ
FØ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF

170 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix B — Character Sets

Characters in Font
c23 OCR A

ØØ Ø1 Ø2 Ø3 Ø4 Ø5 Ø6 Ø7 Ø8 Ø9 ØA ØB ØC ØD ØE ØE

1Ø 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

2Ø 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

3Ø 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

4Ø 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

5Ø 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

6Ø 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

7Ø 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

8Ø 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F

9Ø 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F

AØ A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF

BØ B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF

CØ C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF

DØ D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D8 DA DB DC DD DE DF

EØ E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF

FØ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
IPL024.eps

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 171

Appendix B — Character Sets

Characters in Font
c24 OCR B Size 2

ØØ Ø1 Ø2 Ø3 Ø4 Ø5 Ø6 Ø7 Ø8 Ø9 ØA ØB ØC ØD ØE ØE

1Ø 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

2Ø 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

3Ø 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

4Ø 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

5Ø 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

6Ø 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

7Ø 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

8Ø 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F

9Ø 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F

AØ A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF

BØ B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF

CØ C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF

DØ D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D8 DA DB DC DD DE DF

EØ E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF

FØ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
IPL025.eps

172 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix B — Character Sets

Characters in Fonts
c25 8 point
c26 12 point
c28 20 point

ØØ Ø1 Ø2 Ø3 Ø4 Ø5 Ø6 Ø7 Ø8 Ø9 ØA ØB ØC ØD ØE ØE

1Ø 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

! " # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /
2Ø 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
3Ø 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
4Ø 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] _
5Ø 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
6Ø 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

p q r s t u v w x y z { } ∼
7Ø 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

, ƒ ... † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š › Œ Z
8Ø 81 82 83 ”
84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F

‘ ’ “ ” • – — ~ ™ š › œ z Ÿ
9Ø 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F

¡ ¢ | § © a ® -
£ ¤ ¥ | ¨ « ¬ -
AØ A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF

±
2 3
´ µ ¶ . Ç 1 0
» 1
4
1
2
3
4
¿
BØ B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF

À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
CØ C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF

D Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö ? Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Y´ I ß
DØ D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D8 DA DB DC DD DE DF

à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
EØ E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF

o~ ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü y´ Io ÿ
FØ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
IPL026.eps

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 173

Appendix B — Character Sets

174 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 C Creating User-Defined
Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

This appendix explains how to create user-defined bitmap fonts and

graphics.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 175

Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics

You can create user-defined graphics (user-defined characters, or UDCs) in
two ways: one bit per byte or six bits per byte. To use the UDC in a format,
you must first define a graphic field using the IPL command Un[,name].
For more information, see the “User-Defined Character Field, Create or
Edit” command on page 155.

Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Graphics

One bit per byte is the standard graphic format used for downloading to an
Intermec 8636/8646 printer. You can download a one bit per byte graphic
to the printer when it is in 86XX Emulation mode. A one bit per byte
bitmap image is an arrangement of ones and zeros that looks similar to the
following example.

Example of One Bit Per Byte Bitmap Image

Bitmap Pattern Row
000000010000000 Row 0
000000111000000 Row 1
000001011100000 Row 2
000010011110000 Row 3
000100011111000 Row 4
001000011111100 Row 5
010000011111110 Row 6
100000011111111 Row 7
010000010000010 Row 8
001000010000100 Row 9
000100010001000 Row 10
000010010010000 Row 11
000001010100000 Row 12
000000111000000 Row 13
000000010000000 Row 14

If you look closely at the bitmap pattern above, you can see that it is the
outline of a diamond with a line down the middle and the upper right
corner blacked in.
To create your own graphic
1 Draw your design on a piece of graph paper:.

176 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

IPL.027

2 Convert each of the squares to either a one or a zero (the zeros are blanks
and the ones are dots), and type it into a text file column by column.
When you send the file to the printer, a character in the file represents
either a dot or a blank when the image prints.
UØ ➤ U14

ooooooo I ooooooo
oooooo I I I oooooo
ooooo I o I I I ooooo
oooo I oo I I I I oooo
ooo I ooo I I I I I ooo
oo I oooo I I I I I I oo
o I ooooo I I I I I I I o
I oooooo I I I I I I I I
o I ooooo I ooooo I o
oo I oooo I oooo I oo
ooo I ooo I ooo I ooo
oooo I oo I oo I oooo
ooooo I o I o I ooooo
oooooo I I I oooooo
ooooooo I ooooooo
IPL.028

3 Read the pattern of ones and zeros down each column starting at the top
left corner. The first column on the left becomes the data for the u0
command line, the second column becomes the data for the u1
command line, and so on. Type this into a text file:

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 177

Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

ooooooo I ooooooo
UØ,
I oooooo I oooooo I
U1,
o I ooooo I ooooo I o
U2,
oo I oooo I oooo I oo
U3,
ooo I ooo I ooo I ooo
U4,
oooo I oo I oo I oooo
U5,
ooooo I o I o I ooooo
U6,
I I I I I I I I I oooooo
U7,
I I I o I I I I o I ooooo
U8,
I I oo I I I I oo I oooo
U9,
I ooo I I I I ooo I ooo
U10,
oooo I I I I oooo I oo
U11,
ooooo I I I ooooo I o
U12,
oooooo I I oooooo I
U13,
ooooooo I ooooooo
U14,
IPL.029

4 Ensure that the printer is in 86XX Emulation mode, and then add the
protocol characters and define the bitmap as a user-defined graphic. The
following example gives the graphic the number 3, the name
“diamond,” the dimensions 15 rows by 15 columns, and adds the ASCII
characters necessary for the printer to understand the graphic.

Example of Defining a Bitmap as a User-Defined Graphic

Command Line Description
<STX><ESC>c<ETX> Selects 86XX mode
<STX><ESC>P<ETX> Enter Program mode
<STX>G3,diamond;x15;y15;<ETX> Create UDC bitmap 3
(diamond)
<STX>u0,000000010000000;<ETX> Define column 0
<STX>u1,000000101000000;<ETX> Define column 1
<STX>u2,000001000100000;<ETX> Define column 2
<STX>u3,000010000010000;<ETX> Define column 3
<STX>u4,000100000001000;<ETX> Define column 4
<STX>u5,001000000000100;<ETX> Define column 5
<STX>u6,010000000000010;<ETX> Define column 6
<STX>u7,111111111111111;<ETX> Define column 7
<STX>u8,011111110000010;<ETX> Define column 8
<STX>u9,001111110000100;<ETX> Define column 9
<STX>u10,000111110001000;<ETX> Define column 10
<STX>u11,000011110010000;<ETX> Define column 11
<STX>u12,000001110100000;<ETX> Define column 12
<STX>u13,000000111000000;<ETX> Define column 13
<STX>u14,000000010000000;<ETX> Define column 14
<STX>R;<ETX> Save and exit to Print mode

178 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Graphics

The six bits per byte format is more compact than one bit per byte. When
you use six bits per byte, you can download large graphics more quickly.
The printer must be in Advanced mode (2.5 mil or 5.0 mil) to use the six
bits per byte format. The only difference between 2.5 mil and 5.0 mil mode
is the size of the image when it prints.
The arrangement of the bits is very important in this format. Eight bits (0
through 7) compose every byte, but the printer only uses bits 0 through 5
to map the image.
You must always set bit 6 (the seventh bit) to 1 so you can download data to
the printer. 7-bit hosts reserve bit 7 (the eighth bit) for parity and
compatibility, so the range of characters for any given UDC is 40 hex (@)
to 127 hex („ delete character).
You can download graphics like the previous one bit per byte (diamond)
bitmap example in a six bits per byte format by following the procedure
below. Please refer to “Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Fonts” on
page 182 for an illustrated example of creating a six bits per byte format.
To download a six bits per byte graphic
1 Draw the graphic on graph paper.
2 Change the graph paper drawing into a pattern of ones (square is filled
in) and zeros (square is empty).
3 Starting from the top row, divide each vertical column into groups of six
digits. (If the bottom group has less than six digits, add zeros to this
group until it also has six.) The six digits in each group are the six bits
that you download in a byte of data. The top digit of each group is bit 0,
the bottom digit is bit 5.
4 Add a 1 in the bit 6 position, and then add a 0 in the bit 7 position so
that each group now has eight digits. (Eight digits complete the byte.)
5 Starting with the first group of 8 bits in the first column, reverse the
order of each group so that bit 0 is now last and bit 7 is first. Work from
the top of each column to the bottom. Each eight-digit group is now a
binary representation of an ASCII character.
6 Translate each eight-digit group into an ASCII character according to
the full ASCII table in Appendix A.
7 Make sure the printer is in Advanced mode and not in 86XX Emulation
mode. For help, see the 86XX command or the “Emulation or
Advanced Mode on Power-Up” command on page 108.
8 Download the graphic so that each column is represented by a
command string.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 179

Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Here is the same format for the diamond shape graphic shown earlier, but
this time it is in six bits per byte format with ASCII characters.

Example of Six Bits Per Byte Graphic Image

Command Definition
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> Selects Advanced mode
<STX><ESC>P<ETX> Enter Program mode
<STX>G2,diamond;x15;y15;<ETX> Create UDC bitmap 2 (diamond),
15 rows by 15 columns
<STX>u0,@B@;<ETX> Define column 0
<STX>u1,@E@;<ETX> Define column 1
<STX>u2,`H@;<ETX> Define column 2
<STX>u3,PP@;<ETX> Define column 3
<STX>u4,H`@;<ETX> Define column 4
<STX>u5,D@A;<ETX> Define column 5
<STX>u6,B@B;<ETX> Define column 6
<STX>u7,<DEL><DEL>G;<ETX> Define column 7
<STX>u8,~CB;<ETX> Define column 8
<STX>u9,|CA;<ETX> Define column 9
<STX>u10,xc@;<ETX> Define column 10
<STX>u11,pS@;<ETX> Define column 11
<STX>u12,`K@;<ETX> Define column 12
<STX>u13,@G@;<ETX> Define column 13
<STX>u14,@B@;<ETX> Define column 14
<STX>R;<ETX> Save and exit to Print mode

After downloading the graphic to the printer, download the following

format to see how the graphic prints. A label similar to the one following
the format is printed.

Example - Downloading Format for Six Bits Per Byte Graphic

Command Definition
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> Selects Advanced mode
<STX><ESC>P<ETX> Enter Program mode
<STX>E4;F4<STX> Create format 4
<STX>U1;o1050,650;c2;w20;h20;<ETX> Create graphic field 1,
origin of 1050,650, use
graphic 2, and magnify it
by a factor of 20
<STX>R;<ETX> Save and exit to Print mode
<STX><ESC>E4<ETX> Select format 4
<STX><ETB><ETX> Print

180 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

IPL.030

Six Bits Per Byte Graphic: After downloading the graphic image and the format for the
graphic, this graphic is what your printer prints.

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Fonts

There are two ways to create user-defined fonts: one bit per byte format
(86XX Emulation mode) or six bits per byte format (Advanced mode).

Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Fonts

In 86XX Emulation mode, the printer receives downloaded fonts in the
same manner as the 8636/8646 printers. You create characters column by
column, from the top of the column downward. In 86XX Emulation
mode, each byte of data represents one bit in the bitmap. The following
example lists the commands and data required to define a font with the two
characters “$” (t36) and “i” (t105). See “Creating One Bit Per Byte User-
Defined Graphics” on page 176 for more information.

Example of User-Defined Font, One Bit Per Byte

Commands Definition
<STX><ESC>c<ETX> Selects 86XX Emulation mode
<STX><ESC>P<ETX> Enter Program mode
<STX>T11,FONT11<ETX> Create bitmap font 11
<STX>x10;y14;<ETX> Define cell width and height
<STX>t36;Z12;<ETX> Create character 36 ($), character
width is 12
<STX>u0,00111110001100;<ETX> Define column 0

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 181

Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Example of User-Defined Font, One Bit Per Byte (continued)

Commands Definition
<STX>u1,01111111001110;<ETX> Define column 1
<STX>u2,01100011000110;<ETX> Define column 2
<STX>u3,01100011000110;<ETX> Define column 3
<STX>u4,11111111111111;<ETX> Define column 4
<STX>u5,11111111111111;<ETX> Define column 5
<STX>u6,01100011000110;<ETX> Define column 6
<STX>u7,01100011000110;<ETX> Define column 7
<STX>u8,01110011111110;<ETX> Define column 8
<STX>u9,00110001111100;<ETX> Define column 9
<STX>t105;Z4;<ETX> Create character 105 (i), character
width is 4
<STX>u4,00110011111111;<ETX> Define column 4
<STX>u5,00110011111111;<ETX> Define column 5
<STX>R;<ETX> Save and exit to Print mode

Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Fonts

You can also create bitmaps in Advanced mode. In Advanced mode, each
data byte represents six bits in the bitmap. See the following example to
create a six bits per byte format like the previous one bit per byte (“$” and
“i”) bitmap font examples.
To download a six bits per byte format
1 Draw the character on graph paper.
u0 u9
o o o o I I o o o o
o I I I I I I I I o
I I I I I I I I I I
6 digits
I I o o I I o o I I
I I o o I I o o o o
I I o o I I o o o o
I I I I I I I I I o
o I I I I I I I I I
o o o o I I o o I I
6 digits
o o o o I I o o I I
I I o o I I o o I I
I I o o I I I I I I
o I I I I I I o
I I
2 digits
(add zeros) o o o o I I o o o o
IPL.031

2 Change the graph paper drawing into a pattern of ones and zeros.
3 Starting with the first column, divide each vertical column into groups
of six digits. (If the bottom group has less than six digits, add zeros to
this group until it also has six.) The six digits in each group are the six
bits that you download in a byte of data. The top digit of each group is
bit 0, and the bottom digit is bit 5.

182 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

u0 u1 u2 u3 u4 u5 u6 u7 u8 u9
bit Ø o o o o I I o o o o
o I I I I I I I I o
I I I I I I I I I I
I I o o I I o o I I
I I o o I I o o o o
bit 5 I I o o I I o o o o
bit 6 I I I I I I I I I I
bit 7 o o o o o o o o o o
bit Ø I I I I I I I I I o
o I I I I I I I I I
o o o o I I o o I I
o o o o I I o o I I
I I o o I I o o I I
bit 5 I I I I I I I I I I
bit 6 I I I I I I I I I I
bit 7 o o o o o o o o o o
bit Ø o I I I I I I I I o
o o o o I I o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o
bit 5 o o o o o o o o o o
bit 6 I I I I I I I I I I
bit 7 o o o o o o o o o o
IPL.032

Byte Mapping: This illustration shows how to map a character in the six bits per
byte format.

4 Add a 1 in the bit 6 position, and then add a 0 in the bit 7 position so
that each group now has eight digits. Eight digits complete the byte.
5 Starting with the first group of eight bits in the first column (u0),
reverse the order of each group so that bit 0 is now last and bit 7 is first.
Work from the top of each column to the bottom. Each eight-digit
group is now a binary representation of an ASCII character.

Note: In this illustration, each row now represents a column.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 183

Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

bit 7

bit Ø

bit 7

bit Ø

bit 7

bit Ø
uØ o I I I I I oo o I I I ooo I o I oooooo
u1 o I I I I I I o o I I I oo I I o I ooooo I
u2 o I ooo I I o o I I ooo I I o I ooooo I
u3 o I ooo I I o o I I ooo I I o I ooooo I
u4 o I I I I I I I o I I I I I I I o I oooo I I
u5 o I I I I I I I o I I I I I I I o I oooo I I
u6 o I ooo I I o o I I ooo I I o I ooooo I
u7 o I ooo I I o o I I ooo I I o I ooooo I
u8 o I oo I I I o o I I I I I I I o I ooooo I
u9 o I oo I I oo o I I I I I I o o I oooooo

IPL.033

6 Translate each eight-digit group into an ASCII character according to

the full ASCII table in Appendix A.
u0 = |q@
u1 = ~sA
u2 = FcA
u3 = FcA
u4 = <DEL><DEL>C
u5 = <DEL><DEL>C
u6 = FcA
u7 = FcA
u8 = N<DEL>A
u9 = L~@
7 Make sure the printer is in Advanced mode and not in 86XX Emulation
mode.
8 Download the font so that you represent each column with a command
string.
Here are the previously defined characters shown in a six bits per byte
format with ASCII characters.

Example of User-Defined Font, Six Bits Per Byte

Commands Definitions
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> Selects Advanced mode
<ESC>P;<ETX> Enters Program mode
<STX>T11,FONT11<ETX> Create bitmap font 11
<STX>x10;y14;<ETX> Define cell width (10) and cell height
(14)
<STX>t36;Z12;<ETX> Create ASCII character 36 ($), define
character width as 12
<STX>u0,|q@;<ETX> Defines column 0
<STX>u1,~sA;<ETX> Defines column 1

184 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Example of User-Defined Font, Six Bits Per Byte (continued)

Commands Definitions
<STX>u2,FcA;<ETX> Defines column 2
<STX>u3,FcA;<ETX> Defines column 3
<STX>u4,<DEL><DEL>C;<ETX> Defines column 4
<STX>u5,<DEL><DEL>C;<ETX> Defines column 5
<STX>u6,FcA;<ETX> Defines column 6
<STX>u7,FcA;<ETX> Defines column 7
<STX>u8,N<DEL>A;<ETX> Defines column 8
<STX>u9,L~@;<ETX> Defines column 9
<STX>t105;Z4;<ETX> Creates ASCII character 105 (i), define
character width as 4
<STX>u0,L<DEL>C;<ETX> Defines column 0
<STX>u1,L<DEL>C;<ETX> Defines column 1
<STX>R;<ETX> Saves and exits to Print mode

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 185

Appendix C — Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

186 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 D User-Defined Interface Tables

This appendix contains the user-defined interface tables, which you may
need when programming with IPL. These tables show commands in the
order that you must download them when you replace the User-Defined
Command/Protocol characters. A table is shown for each type of
command specified by a value for “t”.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 187

Appendix D — User-Defined Interface Tables

Print Commands (t = 0)
This list shows the Print Mode commands in the order you must download
them when you are replacing the command codes.

Print Commands (t = 0)
Default Print Command Hex Value Print Command Description
NUL 00 Command Terminator 1
SOH 01 Set Preamble
EOT 04 Set Postamble
ENQ 05 Status Inquiry
ACK 06 Select First Data Entry Field
BEL 07 Transmit Error Code
BS 08 Warm Boot
LF 0A Command Terminator 2
VT 0B Status Dump
FF 0C Form Feed
CR 0D Select Next Data Entry Field
SO 0E Label Cut Command
SI 0F Go to Shift Command Table
DLE 10 Reset
SYN 16 Set Intercharacter Delay
ETB 17 Print
CAN 18 Clear All Data
EM 19 Abort Print Job
SUB 1A Data Shift
ESC 1B Go to Escape Command Table
FS 1C Numeric Field Separator
GS 1D Alphanumeric Field Separator
RS 1E Set Quantity Count
US 1F Set Batch Count
DEL 7F Clear Data From Current Field

188 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix D — User-Defined Interface Tables

Escape Print Commands (t = 1)

This table lists the <ESC> commands in the order you must download
them.

Escape Print Commands (t=1)

Default Escape Command Hex Value Escape Command Description
SYN 16 Set Message Delay
(space) 20 Enter Start/Stop Character
C 43 Select Advanced Mode
D 44 Set Field Decrement
E 45 Select Format
F 46 Select Field
G 47 Select Page
H 48 Transmit Printhead Parameters
I 49 Set Field Increment
L 4C Transmit Label and Gap Length
M 4D Transmit Software Version Number
N 4E Disable Increment/Decrement
O 4F Transmit Options Selected
P 50 Enter Program Mode
Q 51 Transmit Quantity and Batch Count
T 54 Enter Test and Service Mode
Z 5A Transmit User-Defined Command
Tables
c 63 Select 86XX Emulation Mode
d 64 Enable Auto-Transmit 2
e 65 Enable Auto-Transmit 3
g 67 Select Direct Graphics Mode
j 6A Enable Auto-Transmit 1
k 6B Disable Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3
m 6D Transmit Static RAM Usage
p 70 Transmit Configuration Parameters
u 75 Transmit User-Defined Characters
v 76 Transmit Font
x 78 Transmit Format
y 79 Transmit Page

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 189

Appendix D — User-Defined Interface Tables

Shift Print Commands (t = 2)

This list shows the Shift commands in the order you must download them.
You must precede these commands with the “Go to Shift Command Table”
command (default value SI) listed in the Print Commands (t = 0) table on
page 188.

Shift Print Commands (t = 2)

Default Shift Command Hex Value Shift Command Description
A 41 Control Panel Access
C 43 86XX or Advanced Mode on Power-Up
D 44 Set End-of-Print Skip Distance
F 46 Set Top of Form
H 48 Set Printhead Pressure
I 49 Set Number of Image Bands
L 4C Set Maximum Label Length
N 4E Define Amount of Storage
O 4F Online or Offline on Power-Up
R 52 Enable or Disable Label Retract
S 53 Set Print Speed
T 54 Select Label Stock Type
U 55 Set Printhead Test Parameters
W 57 Set Label Width
Z 5A Set Ribbon Save Zone
a 61 Audible Alarm
b 62 Increase Takeup Motor Torque
c 63 Enable or Disable Cutter
d 64 Set Dark Adjust
f 66 Adjust Label Rest Point
g 67 Select TTR or Direct Thermal
h 68 Select Printhead Loading Mode
i 69 IBM Language Translation
l 6C Select Printer Language
p 70 Set Pin 11/20 Protocol
r 72 Set Label Retract Distance
t 74 Enable or Disable Self-Strip

190 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix D — User-Defined Interface Tables

Status Responses and Auto-Transmit Commands (t = 3)

This list contains the status responses and auto-transmit commands in the
order you must download them.

Status Responses and Auto-Transmit Commands (t = 3)

Status Command Hex Value Status Description
GS 1D Buffer Already Full
SO 0E Printhead Test Fail
US 1F Label Path Open
US 1F Ribbon Fault
EM 19 No Label Stock
DC3 13 Buffer Now Full
EOT 04 RFID Tag Write Error
VT 01 RFID Tag Read Error
BS 08 Takeup Reel Full
SI* 0F Printhead Hot
FS 1C Label at Strip Pin
ACK 06 RFID Tag Write Ok
DC1** 11 Skipping
DC1** 11 Printing
DC1** 11 Ready
DC1 Auto-Transmit 1** 11 Clear
FS Auto-Transmit 1 1C Label at Strip Pin
BS Auto-Transmit 1 08 Takeup Reel Full
EM Auto-Transmit 1 19 No Label Stock
US Auto-Transmit 1 1F Ribbon Fault
DC1 Auto-Transmit 2 11 Room in Buffer
HT Auto-Transmit 3 09 Imager Overrun
SOH Auto-Transmit 3 01 Print Job Complete and Buffer Empty
RS Auto-Transmit 3 1E Insufficient RAM

*Some older Intermec printers may not support this entry.

**The status responses in the above table are for standard protocol. In XON/XOFF
protocol, most of the status responses are the same; however, instead of DC1, the status
response is DC2, and instead of DC2, the status response is DC4.
See your printer user’s manual for more information about protocols and status responses.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 191

Appendix D — User-Defined Interface Tables

Protocol Commands (t = 4)
This list contains the protocol codes in the order you must download them.

Protocol Commands (t = 4)
Command Characters Hex Value Command Description
GS 1D SELECT IN
FS 1C POLL IN
EOT 04 RES IN
ENQ 05 REQ IN
STX 02 SOM IN
ETX 03 EOM IN
ACK 06 AFF IN
NAK 15 NEG IN
DLE 10 DLE IN
DC1 11 XON IN
DC3 13 XOFF IN
GS 1D SELECT OUT
FS 1C POLL OUT
EOT 04 RES OUT
ENQ 05 REQ OUT
STX 02 SOM OUT
ETX 03 EOM OUT
ACK 06 AFF OUT
NAK 15 NEG OUT
DLE 10 DLE OUT
DC1 11 XON OUT
DC3 13 XOFF OUT
ENQ 05 Proto-Cmd 1
VT 0B Proto-Cmd 2
20 (ms) 14 Timeout on EOM ACK
(Range: 0 - 255)

192 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix D — User-Defined Interface Tables

Communications Protocol Characters

This table shows the characters available for different protocols. Refer to the
protocol you are using for your system.

Communications Protocol Characters

Protocol Characters Standard XON/XOFF Polling Mode D Multi-Drop
Select In GS GS
Poll In FS FS
Reset In EOT EOT
Request for Acknowledgment In ENQ ENQ
Start of Message In STX STX STX STX
End of Message In ETX ETX ETX ETX
Acknowledgment In ACK ACK
Negative Acknowledgment In NAK NAK
Data Line Escape In DLE DLE DLE DLE
XON In DC1
XOFF In DC3
Select Out GS
Poll Out FS
Reset Out EOT EOT
Request for Acknowledgment Out ENQ ENQ
Start of Message Out STX STX
End of Message Out ETX ETX
Acknowledgment Out ACK ACK
Negative Acknowledgment Out NAK NAK NAK
Data Line Escape Out DLE DLE DLE DLE
XON Out DC1
XOFF Out DC3
Status Enquiry In ENQ ENQ
Status Dump In VT VT
Timeout on EOM ACK DC4 DC4

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 193

Appendix D — User-Defined Interface Tables

194 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 E Using Direct Graphics Mode

This appendix explains how to use Direct Graphics mode, which can
significantly reduce the amount of time needed to download and image a
graphic.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 195

Appendix E — Using Direct Graphics Mode

What Is Direct Graphics Mode?

You can significantly reduce the amount of time necessary to download and
image a graphic by using Direct Graphics mode. Direct Graphics mode
allows the printer to receive a compressed bitmap graphic and image it
directly into the image bands without storing it in the printer.
Before you download the graphic, you must compress it into run-length
encoded (RLE) data. The data compression greatly reduces the amount of
data to download and the rasterized graphic requires minimal processing to
image it into the image bands. You no longer need to store the graphic in
Program mode and then set up a format in Print mode.
When you download a direct graphic to the printer, the printer stores the
graphic in the image bands until you:
• clear the label data.
• set up another format.
• enter Program mode or Test and Service mode.
When printing a label with direct graphics, you must have enough dynamic
RAM installed in your printer to contain the entire label. Because Intermec
printers normally reuse image bands, you can print long labels with
standard RAM; however, when you download direct graphics, the printer
retains no information regarding the existence of the graphic in its image
bands. Therefore, the printer cannot reuse those image bands when you
download a direct graphic.
With standard dynamic RAM, you should be able to print almost any label
up to 2.4 cm (6 in) long. You may need to install expanded dynamic RAM
for longer labels.

What Is Run-Length Encoding?

Run-length encoding (RLE) is a method of compressing bitmap graphics.
RLE compresses graphics that have repeated runs of white or black dots in a
column, reducing the amount of time required to download the graphics to
a printer.
RLE sends a series of commands that define each bitmap column of a
graphic and takes advantage of a series of repeated dots within a column by
encoding them as transition commands. Instead of sending the entire
column of bitmap data, it sends commands telling the printer how many
series of black and white dots to image.
If columns are identical, a command can instruct the printer to repeat the
last column. RLE is ideal for bar code graphics or designs with simple
patterns.
In cases where patterns do not exist, you can send uncompressed bitmap
data to the printer. You can mix raw bitmap data and RLE commands to
ensure the most efficient way to download a graphic.

196 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix E — Using Direct Graphics Mode

The RLE file may contain five types of data, each of which is one byte long:

Data Types in RLE Files

Byte Format, Range, and
Type Description Data Represented
Immediate • Recognized and executed as regular IPL commands or protocol Byte format (7-0): 000xxxx
commands commands Range: 0-31
• Removed from compressed data Data represented: N/A
Compression • Used as part of the compressed graphics file to change or set Byte format (7-0): 001xxxx
encodation data modes, repeat lines, change the origin for the next lines of Range: 32 - 63
commands data, or end the compress graphics file and return to IPL
Data represented: N/A
command printing
Low order data • 7 bits long and may be combined with high order data. 8th bit Byte format (7-0): 1xxxxxx
is always set to 1. Range: 128 - 255
• Can represent up to 7 bits of data (0-127) Data represented: 0 - 127
• Must be preceded by a command byte so the printer knows how
to interpret them
High order data • 6 bits long and always combined with low order data. 7th bit is Byte format (7-0): 01xxxxx
always set to 1 and 8th bit is always set to 0. Range: 64 - 127
• When combined with low order data, can represent up to 13 Data represented: 0 - 63
bits of data (0-8191)
• Must be preceded by a command byte so the printer knows how
to interpret them
• Printer ignores high order data followed by a command or more
high order data
Bitmap data • Composed of uncompressed bytes (7 data bits per byte) that Byte format (7-0): 1xxxxxx
represent columns of your graphic. 8th bit is always set to 1. Range: 128 - 255
Data represented: Raw data

How Do I Send a Direct Graphic to the Printer?

Once you have compressed the graphic, use the following commands to
send the RLE file to the printer.

Direct Graphics Mode, Enter

Purpose: Instructs the printer to receive RLE compressed graphics data in nibblized
format.
Default: m=0
Syntax: <ESC>gm
where m specifies the format of the data to follow.
m = 08 bits per byte.
m = 17 bits per byte of nibblized data.
When you select m = 0, the printer parses subsequent data streams as RLE
commands. The printer still recognizes immediate IPL commands. Non-
immediate commands are not parsed. The printer resumes normal IPL
parsing when it receives an end of bitmap RLE command.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 197

Appendix E — Using Direct Graphics Mode

When you select m = 1, the printer receives the RLE compressed graphics
data in nibblized format. The printer converts each pair of bytes from
ASCII to their numerical equivalent and combines them to form the
original byte. For example:

ASCII Numerical Original byte

1,B 0x1,0xB 0x1B

Change Origin
Purpose: Tells the printer the X and Y coordinates of the next RLE data column.
Default: 0,0
Syntax: 0x21[x,y]
where x and y are the coordinates of the next data column. Values for x and
y range from 0 to 8191.
The change origin command tells the printer where to place the graphic on
the label. If you do not send the command, the printer uses the default
setting of 0,0.
You can use the command to place different sections of the RLE graphic in
different parts of the label.
Notes: It is not necessary to use this command for every column. Column-to-
column transitions are automatic following the end of line command.
The default origin of any direct graphic (0,0) is in the lower left corner
instead of in the upper left corner. The upper left corner is the label format
origin.

End of Bitmap
Purpose: Marks the end of RLE encoded data.
Syntax: 0x28
Notes: The printer parses subsequent characters as IPL commands.
On the final column of the RLE encoded data, an end of line command
does not need to precede the end of bitmap command.

End of Line
Purpose: Causes the printer to assign subsequent bitmap data to the next column.
Syntax: 0x22
Notes: The printer images the next data stream in the next column position,
incrementing the X position. This command causes an action similar in
function to a carriage return.

Raw Bitmap Data Follows

Purpose: Indicates raw bitmap data bytes follow.
Syntax: 0x27[data]

198 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix E — Using Direct Graphics Mode

Notes: The printer only uses the first 7 bits of the data byte. If you set a bit to 1, it
prints black. The most significant bit prints farthest to the left. Data order
runs from right to left, so the first dot in a column is the least significant bit
of the first data byte.

Repeat Last Line

Purpose: Causes the printer to copy the previously defined column n number of
times.
Syntax: 0x24n
Values for n range from 0 - 8191.
Notes: The printer automatically increments the X origin of each column. This
command is only valid when preceded by a column of encoded, raw data or
an end of line command.

Transition Black
Purpose: Transition data follows. The first transition is black.
Syntax: 0x25[data,data,...data]
where data specifies the number of black or white dots. Values for data can
range from 0 - 8191.
Notes: Each transition data specifies the number of dots to draw (either black or
white). Each data alternates black and white dot counts.

Transition White
Purpose: Transition data follows. The first transition is white.
Syntax: 0x26[data,data,...data]
where data specifies the number of black or white dots. Values for data can
range from 0 - 8191.
Notes: Each transition data specifies the number of dots to draw (either black or
white). Each data alternates black and white dot counts.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 199

Appendix E — Using Direct Graphics Mode

Using Direct Graphics Commands

This example consists of two parts: a graphic and a line. The origin of the
direct graphic is defined the same as the origin of a normal graphic. In this
example, the coordinates for the origin of the complex graphic are
X0,Y450; however, once you enter Direct Graphics mode, your printer
loads the information in the reverse Y direction. Each column of the
graphic loads from the bottom to the top. Y coordinates now start at 0 from
the bottom left corner and increase in size as the data loads. So, the printer
starts loading data for the complex graphic at X0,Y450 and loads up to
X0,Y425. Likewise, the data for the line starts loading at X19,Y450 and
loads up to X19,Y0.

450

25 25
X0, Y0 24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
Y 10
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
9 9
12
11
Y 10
9
8
7
8 8
6

7
5
4
3
2
1
7
0

6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 19
X
6
5 5
4 4
X0,Y450 X19,Y450 3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 19
X

3440A.001

Direct Graphics Commands: This example shows how the printer loads information in
Direct Graphics mode.

Here is a hex data file for the example above:

1B 67 30 21 80 43 C2 27 90 A8 D5
90 22 26 84 96 22 22 26 8C 84 22
24 82 25 88 22 21 93 43 C2 25 43
C2 28

200 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix E — Using Direct Graphics Mode

The next table explains the hex data file in the example.

Hex Data Commands in Example

Data Command Description
1B 67 30 <ESC>g0 Enter Direct Graphics mode
21 80 43 C2 0x21 Change origin
80 80 - 80 (LO) = 0x00 -> X0
43 C2 43 - 40 (HI) = 0x03
C2 - 80 (LO) = 0x42
(0x03 ∗ 0x80) + 0x42 = 1C2 -> Y450
27 90 A8 D5 90 22 0x27 Raw bitmap data follows, starts at Y0
90 90 - 80 (LO) = 0x10 -> 1 dot at Y4
A8 A8 - 80 (LO) = 0x28 -> 2 dots at Y10 and Y12
D5 D5 - 80 (LO) = 0x45 -> 3 dots at Y14, Y17, and Y20
90 90 - 80 (LO) = 0x10 -> 1 dot at Y25
0x22 End of line
26 84 96 22 0x26 Transition white
84 84 - 80 (LO) = 4 white
96 96 - 80 (LO) = 22 black
0x22 End of line
22 0x22 End of line
26 8C 84 22 0x26 Transition white
8D 8D - 80 (LO) = 13 white
84 84 - 80 (LO) = 4 black
0x22 End of line
24 82 0x24 Repeat last line
82 82 - 80 (LO) = 2 times
25 88 22 0x25 Transition black
88 89 - 80 (LO) = 9 black
0x22 End of line
21 93 43 C2 0x21 Change origin
93 93 - 80 (LO) = 0x13 -> X19
43 C2 43 - 40 (HI) = 0x03
C2 - 80 (LO) = 0x42
(0x03 ∗ 0x80) + 0x42 = 1C2 -> Y450
25 43 C2 0x25 Transition black
43 C2 43 - 40 (HI) = 0x03
C2 - 80 (LO) = 0x42
(0x03 ∗ 0x80) + 0x42 = 1C2 -> Y450
28 0x28 End of bitmap

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 201

Appendix E — Using Direct Graphics Mode

202 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 F Symbology Modifiers

This appendix describes the symbology modifiers you use with the Bar
Code, Select Type command. For more information, see the “Bar Code,
Select Type” command on page 126.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 203

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Using Symbology Modifiers

When you choose a symbology for a bar code field using the Bar Code,
Select Type command, you can set options for the symbology. This
appendix explains the different options for each symbology and how the
options affect printing.

Code 39 Modifiers
To select Code 39 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c0[,m]
The default for m is 0.
Values for m
m Description
0 Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. No check digit.
1 Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. Printer enters check digit.
2 Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies.
3 Selects full ASCII Code 39. No check digit.
4 Selects full ASCII Code 39. Printer enters check digit.
5 Selects full ASCII Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies.
6 Selects 43 character Code 39. No check digit.
7 Selects 43 character Code 39. Printer enters check digit.
8 Selects 43 character Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies.

Intermec printers support three different types of Code 39:

• 43 character Code 39
• Full ASCII Code 39
• 8646 compatible Code 39 (except the EasyCoder F4, PD41, PF2i, PF4i
and PM4i). The 8646 compatible version only differs from the full
ASCII version by four characters. The “$”, “%”, “/”, and “+” are
encoded as single characters instead of as “/D”, “/E”, “/O”, and “/K.”
The 8646 compatible version allows the printer to be backward
compatible with 86XX printers.
When you enter <ESC><SPACE> as data, the printer prints the start and
stop characters.

Code 93 Modifiers
To select Code 93 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c1
There are no modifiers for Code 93.

204 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Interleaved 2 of 5 Modifiers
To select Interleaved 2 of 5 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the
syntax is:
c2[,m]
The default for m is 0. The printer adds a zero to character strings that are
odd in length.
Values for m
m Description
0 No check digit.
1 Printer enters check digit.
2 Host enters check digit.

Code 2 of 5 Modifiers
To select Code 2 of 5 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c3[,m]
The default for m is 0.
Values for m
m Description
0 3-bar start/stop code.
1 2-bar start/stop code.

Codabar Modifiers
To select Codabar using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c4[,m]
The default for m is 0.
Values for m
m Description
0 Host enters start/stop codes and printer verifies.
1,x,y Printer enters start code x and stop code y.
The values for x and y can range from A to D and from a to d.

Valid start/stop characters range from A to D and from a to d. You can

define them as part of the bar code field, or you can download them as part
of the print data. Start/stop characters sent down with printer data override
the characters defined by the bar code field.

Code 11 Modifiers
To select Code 11 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 205

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

c5[,m]
The default for m is 0.
Values for m
m Description
0 Printer enters 2 check digits.
1 Printer enters 1 check digit.
2 Host enters 2 check digits and printer verifies.
3 Host enters 1 check digit and printer verifies.

Code 128 Modifiers

To select Code 128 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c6[,m1][,m2][,m3]
The default for m1, m2, and m3 is 0.
Values for m1 and m2
m1,m2 Description
0,0 Keep parentheses and spaces.
0,1 Ignore parentheses and spaces in the bar code but keep them
in the interpretive field.
1,0 Selects UCC-128 Serial Shipping Container Code.
1,1 Selects UCC-128 Serial Shipping Container Code and keep
parentheses and spaces in interpretive field.

In Emulation mode, you can print the Function 1 character by entering

<SUB> 1. In Advanced mode, you can print the Function 1 character by
entering <SUB><SUB> 1. You can print the characters for Function 2, 3,
and 4 in the same way.
UCC-128 serial shipping container code automatically starts in subset C
with a <FNC1>. It is a fixed length version of Code 128 requiring you to
enter 19 numeric characters. The printer forces the first two characters to
zero.
Values for m3
m3 Description
0 Default and recommended settings. Automatically selects character subset.
1 Starts in subset A.
2 Starts in subset B.
3 Starts in subset C.

Note: Intermec recommends that you set m3 to 0 unless you are familiar
with Code 128 subsets. The printer will automatically determine the
correct start subset and perform any necessary switching between subsets.

206 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

m3 is valid only in the EasyCoder PD/PF/PM/PX-series printers when

m1 = 0. If you set m3 to a number other than 0, only characters within the
chosen subset are valid. If you enter characters from another subset, the
printer generates an error code 11 (invalid bar code data) and the bar code
will not print.
To switch to another character subset within the bar code (if m3 = 1, 2, or 3)
• Enter:
<SUB><SUB>n
where n is A, B, or C depending on if you want to switch to subset A, B,
or C.
Or,
where n is S and the current subset is A or B. The next one character is
shifted from the current subset into the other subset (A or B). Then, the
following characters will return to the current subset. If you set n equal
to S and the current subset is C, this command is ignored.

UPC/EAN Modifiers
To select UPC/EAN using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c7[,m1][,m2]
The default for m1 and m2 is 0.
Values for m1
m1 Description
0 Printer enters check digit. Flag 1 enabled.
1 Printer enters check digit. Flag 1 disabled.
2 Host enters check digit and printer verifies Flag 1 enabled.
3 Host enters check digit and printer verifies. Flag 1 disabled.

Values for m2
m2 Description m2 Description
0 variable length 5 UPC Version D1
1 EAN 8 6 UPC Version D2
2 EAN 13 7 UPC Version D3
3 UPC Version A 8 UPC Version D4
4 UPC Version E 9 UPC Version D5

The variable length option selects the UPC/EAN version by the number of
characters in the data field. The number of data characters and check
characters allowed for each version are:
EAN 8 07 data + 1 check character
EAN 13 12 data + 1 check character

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 207

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

EAN 8 07 data + 1 check character

UPC version A 11 data + 1 check character
UPC version E 06 data + 1 check character
UPC version D1 13 data + 1 check character
UPC version D2 18 data + 2 check characters
UPC version D3 22 data + 2 check characters
UPC version D4 25 data + 3 check characters
UPC version D5 29 data + 3 check characters

Use a “.” to delimit the bar code data from the supplemental data. Data to
the right of the “.” is supplemental data; data to the left is bar code data.
You can add the two- or five-digit supplemental to any version of the UPC/
EAN code.
The flag 1 option only applies to EAN 8, EAN 13, and UPC version A. For
EAN 13, enabling the flag 1 option prints the first character of the bar code
interpretive. For EAN 8 and UPC version A, enabling the flag 1 option
moves the first and last character of the bar code interpretive outside of the
guard bars.
UPC versions D1 - D5 are not supported in the 3400C, 3400D, 3400e,
4420, 4440, or the EasyCoder F4 and PD/PF/PM/PX-series printers.

HIBC Code 39 Modifiers

To select HIBC Code 39 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the
syntax is:
c8[,m1][,m2]
The default for m1 is 0.
Values for m1 Conforming to the Supplier Standard
m1 Description
0 Primary format.
1 Alternate primary format.
2[,m2] Secondary format. The linkage character comes from m2, which is the field
identifier.

208 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Values for m1 Conforming to the Provider Standard

m1 Description
3 Single format.
4 First data format.
5[,m2] Second data format. The linkage character comes from m2, which is the field
identifier.
6 Multiple data format.

Code 16K Modifiers

To select Code 16K using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c9
There are no modifiers for Code 16K.
In Emulation mode, use a <SUB> 1 to represent the function 1 character.
To represent the function 1 character in Advanced mode, enter
<SUB><SUB> 1. Represent the characters for functions 2, 3, and 4 in the
same way.
To produce a square symbol, specify a height magnification of 1 in
Advanced mode. To specify a square symbol, use a height magnification of
250 in Emulation mode.

Code 49 Modifiers
To select Code 49 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c10
There are no modifiers for Code 49.
Use a <SUB> 1 to represent the function 1 character in Emulation mode.
In Advanced mode, you can represent the function 1 character by entering
<SUB><SUB> 1. You can represent the characters for functions 2, 3, and 4
in the same way.
To produce a square symbol, specify a height magnification of 1 in
Advanced mode. To specify a square symbol, use a height magnification of
250 in Emulation mode.
The printer supports only the alphanumeric (0) and numeric (2) modes.

POSTNET Modifiers
To select POSTNET using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c11
There are no modifiers for POSTNET.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 209

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

POSTNET uses the height (“h”) and width (“w”) commands in the same
way as a font. Other symbologies use “h” to specify the bar height and “w”
to specify the narrow bar width. POSTNET uses “h” and “w” to magnify
the base character cell. Each character cell is 13 dots high by 22 dots wide.
The default width and height magnification for POSTNET is 2 x 2,
resulting in a symbology sized according to the POSTNET specification.

PDF417 Modifiers
PDF417 is a stacked 2D symbology that provides the ability to scan across
rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row identifiers, and
symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four spaces each and
contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correction symbol
characters appended at the end to recover loss of data.
To select PDF417 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c12[[,m1][,m2][,m3]];
where:
m1 is the number of columns of data characters. Range for m1 is 0 to 30.
Default is 0. For more information, see the next section, “Using m1 to
Select the Number of Columns.”
m2 sets the level of error correction. Range for m2 is 0 to 9. Default is 9.
For more information, see “Using m2 to Set an Error Correction
Level.”
m3 sets the truncate flag. Valid values for m3 are:
0 Disables truncation.
1 Enables truncation.
For more information, see “Using m3 to Set the Truncate Flag” on
page 211.

Using m1 to Select the Number of Columns

m1 is the number of columns of data characters. The range for m1 is 0 to
30 and the default is 0. If you select zero, the printer provides the number
of columns needed to create a symbol that is as close to a square as possible.

Note: When you select zero, the printer selects a height magnification that
is three times the width magnification. The specifications of PDF417
recommend these magnification values for creating a symbol that you can
scan easily.

Using m2 to Select an Error Correction Level

m2 determines the level of error correction. Each level provides a certain
number of detection characters, which can detect and recover a specific
number of faulty characters. The range for m2 is 0 to 9. The default is 9
and allows the printer to automatically select the appropriate level.

210 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

The level of error correction that works best for your data depends on the
amount of characters in your symbols. If you decide to select your own
error correction level, you will need to estimate the number of characters
since they are formed by compressing the raw data you send to the printer.
In general, 1.8 alphanumeric characters generate one symbol character. If
you are using numeric data, 2.9 digits generate one data symbol character.
Intermec recommends that you leave the error correction level at the default
setting of 9. This setting lets the printer select a level, between level 2 and
level 5, that provides the most efficient error correction of your data. The
printer bases the level selection on the number of symbol characters your
data generates.
The following table shows the m2 values (error correction levels), the
recommended data amount that you should use for each value, and the
number of error correction characters that it generates.
Values for m2
Recommended
m2 Amount of Data Error Detection Characters
0 * 2 (error detected, no recovery)
1 * 4
2 1 - 40 8
3 41 - 160 16
4 161 - 320 32
5 321 - 863 64
6 † 128
7 † 256
8 † 512
9 ‡
* You should only use m2 = 0 or 1 if your labels do not have
enough space for more error correction characters. Usually, these
values are not recommended.
† The printer reserves m2 = 6, 7, or 8 for special applications where
the symbol is subject to damage and requires a higher level of
error correction.
‡ m2 = 9 lets the printer set ,m2 to the recommended value for each
symbol based on the number of characters. An m2 value of 9 is
the default setting.

Using m3 to Set the Truncate Flag

m3 is a truncate flag that indicates whether to print the symbol in truncated
form. If truncated, the symbols print without right row indicators and with
only a one-module wide stop character. The values for m3 are 0 to disable
truncating and 1 to enable truncating. The default is 0. To minimize errors
and maintain the best reading performance, Intermec recommends that you
leave m3 equal to 0.
This table shows the approximate data capacity (maximum number of
characters allowed) for the three character sets.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 211

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Data Capacity per Character Set

Character Set Data Capacity
Full ASCII 1108
Alphanumeric 1850
Numeric 2725

Note: 2D symbols encode data by compressing it in different amounts.

Therefore, use these values as guidelines. The exact data capacity varies with
the actual data being encoded.

MaxiCode Modifiers
MaxiCode is a fixed-size 2D symbology where the printer ignores height
and width magnification. This symbology is made up of offset rows of
hexagonal elements, each of which is 35 mils wide by 40 mils high,
arranged around a bull’s-eye finder pattern. Each hexagon represents one bit
of information and is either black or white depending on the state of the
encoded data bit. United Parcel Service (UPS) developed MaxiCode for the
specific purpose of encoding information about a parcel.
To select MaxiCode using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c14[,m1]
The next table lists the possible values for m1. The default value
autodiscriminates between Modes 2, 3, and 4.
Values for m1
m1 Description
2 Structured Carrier Message for numeric postal codes up to 9 digits
3 Structured Carrier Message for alphanumeric postal codes up to 6 characters
4 Standard Symbol
5 Full Enhanced Error Correction (EEC)
6 Reader Programming

Note: If you have developed previous applications using Mode 0, your

printer will still support your application; however, Intermec recommends
using Mode 2 or 3 for new applications.

When you select MaxiCode, you must format your data to conform to the
five fields described in the next table.

Note: The header only applies to Structured Carrier Message (Modes 2 and
3). The Structured Carrier Message header is optional.

212 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

MaxiCode Fields
Field Description of Field Number of Characters Default
1 Header (optional) Nine None
2 Postal code Six or nine None
3 Country code Three 840 (U.S.)
4 Service class Three 999
5 Secondary Message 84 None

1 2 3 4 5

p
IPL.018

Notes: The NULL character is not supported. If the NULL character appears in
the user data, you will lose it along with any following data.
All control characters (<RS>, <GS>, <EOT>, etc.) must be preceded by a
<SUB> character, as illustrated in the following examples.
This example illustrates the command for MaxiCode Mode 2:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1<ETX>
<STX>H0;o10,10<ETX>
<STX>B1;o100,300;f1;c14,2;h6;w6;d0,100<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX>
<STX>MaxiCode Sample Mode 2<CR><ETX>
<STX>[)><SUB><RS>01<SUB><GS>01982039280<SUB><GS>840<SUB>
<GS>001<SUB><GS>1Z94924221455215<SUB><RS>Intermec 6001
36th Ave West Everett, WA 98203<SUB><EOT><ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>
This example illustrates the command for MaxiCode Mode 3:
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E1;F1<ETX>
<STX>H0;o10,10<ETX>
<STX>B1;o100,300;f1;c14,3;h6;w6;d0,100<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
<STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX>
<STX>MaxiCode Sample Mode 3<CR><ETX>
<STX>[)><SUB><RS>01<SUB><GS>96T51654<SUB><GS>484<SUB>
<GS>066<SUB><GS>1Z00000256<SUB><RS><SUB><EOT><ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>

JIS-ITF Modifiers
The JIS-ITF bar code is the Japanese Industry Standard for Interleaved
2 of 5. JIS-ITF bar codes are in a box of solid black that measures 4.75 mm
(0.19 in) and always include an interpretive field [21 x 14O CR-B (JIS x
9001)] centered beneath the bar code field.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 213

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Valid narrow bar width magnifications are 5, 8, and 10 dots. Due to

printhead dot size limitations, the printer cannot achieve a true 2.5 to 1
ratio when using a narrow bar width of 5 dots. The printer uses a wide bar
width of 12 dots for a true 2.4 to 1 ratio instead.
JIS-ITF bar code fields consist of these three categories: standard,
condensed, and enlarged. If you are not using the command to define the
source of the field data, the printer automatically chooses a category. If your
bar code field contains 14 characters, the printer uses standard JIS-ITF. If
your field contains 6, the printer uses the condensed version, and if your
field contains 16, the printer uses the enlarged version.
To select JIS-ITF using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c15[,m]
The default for m is 0.
Values for m
m Description
0 Selects 5 dot narrow bar width magnification.
1 Selects 8 dot narrow bar width magnification.
2 Selects 10 dot narrow bar width magnification.

Defining the Data Source for JIS-ITF Fields

To define the data source for JIS-ITF fields, use the Field Data, Define
Source command. For JIS-ITF, the syntax is:
d[n][,m]
The default for n,m is 0,14. Valid values for n and m are described in the
next table.
Values for m and n
Syntax n= Description
d0[,m] 0 This field receives data from a host. The m is the data length, which can
be set to 6 (condensed), 14 (standard), and 16 (extended).
d2[,m] 2 This field acts as a slave field and receives its data from another field
(master slave). The m is the master slave field ID.
d3[,m] 3 The printer defines the data during Program mode (fixed). The m
determines the JIS-ITF type. If the data length is not exactly 6, 14, or
16, the printer uses the next highest JIS-ITF type with zero padding in
front.

HIBC Code 128 Modifiers

To select HIBC Code 128 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the
syntax is:
c16[,m1][,m2]

214 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

The default for m1 is 0.

Values for m1 Conforming to the Supplier Standard
m1 Description
0 Primary format.
1 Alternate primary format.
2,m2 Secondary format. The linkage character comes from m2,
which is the field identifier.

Values for m1 Conforming to the Provider Standard

m1 Description
3 Single format.
4 First data format.
5,m2 Second data format. The linkage character comes from m2,
which is the field identifier.
6 Multiple data format.

Data Matrix Symbology Versions ECC-100 and ECC-200 Modifiers

Data Matrix is a 2D matrix symbology made up of square modules
arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The finder pattern is a
perimeter to the data region and is one module wide. Two adjacent sides are
solid dark lines. These lines are used to define physical size, orientation, and
symbol distortion. Intermec supports these two versions of Data Matrix:
ECC-100 and ECC-200. Use ECC-200 for new applications.
To select Data Matrix using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the
syntax is:
c17[,m1][,m2][,m3,m4[,m5,m6]]
Data Matrix Default Parameters
Parameter Default Description
m1 200 ECC-200
m2 0 Square
m3 0 Position of current symbol in group
m4 ,m3 Total number of symbols in group
m5 1 File identifier
m6 1 File identifier

m1 is a three-digit number that selects the Data Matrix version. Possible

values are:
100 Specifies ECC-100
200 Specifies ECC-200 (default)

Note: The EasyCoder F4 and PD/PF/PM/PX-series printers only support

m1 = 200.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 215

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

m2 is a one-digit value that indicates whether your symbol will be square or

rectangular. The amount of data you enter determines the size of the
symbol. Possible values are:
0 Square
1 Rectangular
Use m3, m4, m5, and m6 when you define Structured Append symbols
within ECC-200.
Structured Append Parameter Values for Data Matrix

Parameter Description Possible Values

m3 The position of the current symbol in the group 0 - 16
m4 The total number of symbols in the group 0 - 16
m5 File identifier 1 - 254
m6 File identifier 1 - 254

For example, setting m3, m4, m5, and m6 to 2, 5, 1, 43 indicates that the
current symbol definition is the second in a group of 5 with the file
identifier of 1, 43.
If you do not set m3 or you set it to 0, you disable Structured Append
mode. If you do not set m5, m6, the settings default to 1, 1.
Notes: This table lists how many numeric, alpha, or 8-bit characters you can place
in a Data Matrix bar code for each version.

Character Capacity for Data Matrix Versions

Type of Character ECC-100 ECC-200
All numeric 88 3116
All alpha 59 2335
All 8-bit 38 1556

QR Code Modifiers
QR Code is a matrix 2D symbology that encodes data into patterns
consisting of black and white dots or modules. A three position detection
pattern enables omni-directional reading and ultra high-speed reading. QR
Code can handle a wide range of data, including numerical, alphabetical,
Kanji, Hiragana, Katakana, graphics, and control codes. A built-in error
correction function enables the QR Code to repair errors in the code.
To select QR Code using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c18[,m1][,m2][,m3]

216 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Values for m1, m2, m3

Parameter Default Description Possible Values
m1 2 QR model 1 = Model 1
2 = Model 2
m2 M Error correction L = 7% correction
level M = 15% correction
Q = 25% correction
H = 30% correction
m3 8 Mask number 0-7 = Mask type
8 = Auto-selection of mask by printer

Notes: You can only create QR symbols up to 3550 characters.

MicroPDF417 Modifiers
MicroPDF417 is a 2D symbology, derived from PDF417. You use
MicroPDF417 for applications needing improved area efficiency but
without the requirement for PDF417’s maximum data capacity.
MicroPDF417 replaces PDF417’s 17-module-wide start/stop patterns and
left/right row indicators with a unique set of 10-module-wide Row Address
Patterns, which were designed both to reduce overall symbol width and to
enable linear scanning at row heights as low as 2X. MicroPDF417, unlike
PDF417, may only be printed in certain defined combinations of number
of data columns (m1) and number of data rows (m2), up to a maximum of
4 data columns by 44 data rows.
To select MicroPDF417 using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the
syntax is:
c19[,m1][,m2]

Values for m1 and m2

Parameter Default Description
m1 0 Sets the number of data columns in the printed symbol.
The default setting (0) allows the printer to determine the
most efficient size for given data. Possible values are 0
through 4.
m2 0 Sets the number of data rows in the printed symbol. The
default setting (0) allows the printer to determine the most
efficient size for given data. Possible values depend on the
setting for m1.

MicroPDF417 uses the following symbol sizes (data columns x data rows),
each with a distinct error correction capacity:

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 217

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

1x11 2x8 3x6 4x4

1x14 2x11 3x8 4x6
1x17 2x14 3x10 4x8
1x20 2x17 3x12 4x10
1x24 2x20 3x15 4x12
1x28 2x23 3x20 4x15
2x26 3x26 4x20
3x32 4x26
3x38 4x32
3x44 4x38
4x44

RSS Modifiers
The Reduced Space Symbology (RSS) family contains seven different linear
bar codes that can be used individually (c20) or as Composite Components
for the EAN.UCC Composite symbology (c21).
To select RSS using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c20[,m1][,m2][,m3]
RSS Bar Code Descriptions
RSS Bar Code Description
RSS-14 Numeric only linear symbology used to encode the Global Trade
Item Numbers (GTINs) for scanning in the supply chain.
RSS-14 is smaller than EAN-13 or UPC-A and may include up to 13
digits. The check digit is not included in the data.
RSS-14 Truncated Reduced height symbology designed to fit on small, narrow items.
This bar code may include up to 13 digits. The check digit is not
included in the data.
RSS-14 Stacked A variation that is stacked in two rows, and is suitable for applications
with limited width available. This bar code may include up to 13
digits. The check digit is not included in the data.
RSS-14 Stacked Full height version symbology with omni directional scanning
Omnidirectional capability so it can be scanned at retail point-of-sale. This bar code
may include up to 13 digits. The check digit is not included in the
data.
RSS-14 Limited Numeric only linear symbology used to encode the Global Trade
Item Numbers (GTINs) for scanning in the supply chain. This bar
code may include up to 13 digits. The check digit is not included in
the data.
RSS-14 Expanded Encodes a maximum of 74 numeric or 41 alphanumeric characters
from a subset of ISO 646 consisting of the uppercase and lowercase
letters, digits, 20 selected punctuation characters and the FNC1
character. See “ISO 646 Subset Characters” on page 219.
RSS-14 Expanded RSS-14 Expanded symbology that is stacked in 2 to 11 rows.
Stacked

218 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Values for m1, m2, m3

Parameter Default Description Possible Values
m1 2 Select RSS version 0 = RSS-14
1 = RSS-14 Truncated
2 = RSS-14 Stacked
3 = RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional
4 = RSS Limited
5 = RSS Expanded
6 = RSS Expanded Stacked
m2 1 Height of the ,m1 = 2, 3, and 6 only
separator pattern Minimum is 1X the defined bar
row magnification of the barcode (w[n]
command). If too low of a value for m2 is
entered, the height will be changed to the
smallest legal value for the selected
magnification.
m3 2 Number of ,m1 = 6 only
segments per row Even numbers in the range of 2 to 22

The height of the bar codes or the height of each row in the stacked bar
codes is determined by the bar height magnification command (h[n]). For
RSS-14 Stacked, the lower row is set using the value specified in the bar
height magnification command and the upper row height is calculated
from this value. If the bar height magnification command is not sent, the
bar code will default to the proper height specified for the selected width:
• For m1 = 0 h[n] = 33*w[n]
• For m1 = 1 h[n] = 13*w[n]
• For m1 = 2 h[n] = 7*w[n]
• For m1 = 3 h[n] = 33*w[n]
• For m1 = 4 h[n] = 10*w[n]
• For m1 = 5 h[n] = 33*w[n]
• For m1 = 6 h[n] = 34*w[n]
If the amount of data sent to the bar code exceeds the defined limit, an
Error Code 11 is generated and the bar code does not print.
ISO 646 Subset Characters
Character Description Character Description
0-9 + Plus sign
FNC1 , Comma
A to Z - Minus or hyphen
a to z . Period or full stop
! Exclamation mark / Slash or solidus
“ Quotation mark : Colon
% Percent sign ; Semicolon
& Ampersand < Less-than sign

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 219

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

ISO 646 Subset Characters

Character Description Character Description
‘ Apostrophe = Equals sign
( Left parenthesis > Greater-than sign
) Right parenthesis ? Question mark
* Asterisk _ Underline or underscore
space

EAN.UCC Composite Modifiers

The EAN.UCC Composite symbology consists of an EAN.UCC linear
component associated with an adjacent 2D Composite Component.
The linear component encodes the primary identification so that it is
readable by all scanning technologies and so that 2D imagers can use the
linear component as a finder pattern for the adjacent 2D Composite
Component. The linear components include these bar codes:
• UCC/EAN-128
• UPC-A
• EAN-8
• EAN-13
• RSS family of bar codes
The 2D Composite Component encodes supplementary data, such as
batch number or expiration date. There are three types of 2D Composite
Components that are all based on the PDF417 symbology:
• CC-A is a structural variant of MicroPDF417.
• CC-B is a MicroPDF417 symbol.
• CC-C is a PDF417 symbol.
The data for the linear and 2D components is separated by the <HT>
command with the data for the linear component sent first. For example, to
print a Composite bar code with the linear component encoding
112233445566 and the 2D component encoding aabbccddeeff, the data is
sent to the printer as 112233445566<HT>aabbccddeeff.
For all possible combinations of linear and 2D Composite components, see
the next section.

220 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Combinations of Linear and 2D Composite Components and Capacity

2D Composite Component
Linear Component (Max Data Length)

Bar Code Type Data Length CC-A CC-B CC-C

UCC/EAN-128 1-48 digits 56 digits 338 digits 2361 digits
31 char 196 char
EAN-13 13 digits 56 digits 338 digits Not
31 char 196 char available
EAN-8 8 digits 47 digits 219 digits Not
26 char 127 char available
UPC-A 12 digits 56 digits 338 digits Not
31 char 196 char available
UPC-E 8 digits 47 digits 96 digits Not
26 char 55 char available
RSS-14 1-13 digits 56 digits 338 digits Not
RSS-14 Truncated 31 char 196 char available
RSS-14 Stacked 1-13 digits 47 digits 96 digits Not
RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional 26 char 55 char available
RSS Limited 1-13 digits 47 digits 219 digits Not
26 char 127 char available
RSS-14 Expanded 1-74 digits* 56 digits 338 digits Not
RSS-14 Expanded Stacked 1-41 char* 31 char 196 char available

Notes: Data lengths with an asterisk (*) indicate that the actual maximum amount
of data depends on data content.
UCC/EAN-128 uses the same code set as Code 128, except it does not
allow function codes FNC2 through FNC4. FNC1 can be sent to the
printer as the data string <SUB><SUB>1.
2D Composite Components encode characters from the ISO 646 code set.
See “ISO 646 Subset Characters” on page 219.
To select EAN.UCC using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax
is:
c21[,m1][,m2][,m3][,m4][,m5][,m6]
The next table lists valid values for m1 through m6.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 221

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Values for m1, m2, m3, m4, m5, m6

Parameter Default Description Possible Values
m1 0 Select version 0 = UCC/EAN-128 with CC-C
1 = UCC/EAN-128 with CC-A or CC-B
2 = EAN-13 with CC-A or CC-B
3 = EAN-8 with CC-A or CC-B
4 = UPC-A with CC-A or CC-B
5 = UPC-E with CC-A or CC-B
6 = RSS-14 with CC-A or CC-B
7 = RSS-14 Truncated with CC-A or CC-B
8 = RSS-14 Stacked with CC-A or CC-B
9 = RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional with CC-A or CC-B
10 = RSS Limited with CC-A or CC-B
11 = RSS Expanded with CC-A or CC-B
12 = RSS Expanded Stacked with CC-A or CC-B
Note: The printer determines whether CC-A or CC-B will be used
based on the amount of data sent to the 2D Composite Component.
m2 1 Height of the m1 = 0, and 6-12 only:
separator pattern Range is between 1X and 2X the defined bar magnification of the bar
row code (w[n] command).
If too low of a value for m2 is entered, the height is changed to the
smallest legal value for the selected magnification.
If too high a value is entered, an Error Code 11“Invalid bar code data”.
Example: If w[n] is set to 3 the separator height can be 3 to 6.
m3 0 (m1 = 0) Number of m1 = 0: m3 = 0 selects the largest number of columns for the 2D bar
4 (m1 = 12) segments or code to fit within the 1D bar code including its quiet zones. Values for
columns per row m3 are from 1 to 30.
m1 = 12: the number of segments per row.
m4 1 Display space, m4 = 0: the bar code does not include any of the “space”, “(“and “)”
“(“and “)” characters in the data, but these characters are displayed in the human
characters readable interpretive field.
m4 = 1: the bar code and the human readable interpretive field includes
exactly the same data.
m5 0 Height of each m5 = 0: the height is 3X the magnification (default)
row in the 2D
bar code
m6 0 Print the linear m6 = 0: do not print the human readable interpretive field for the
barcode linear bar code
interpretive field m6 = 1: print the human readable interpretive field for the linear bar
code
The human readable interpretive field for the 2D Composite
Component is displayed if the i[n] is set to 1.

Planet Modifiers
Planet is a linear bar code similar to the POSTNET bar code. Planet bar
codes print at a fixed size so any height and width commands are ignored.
To select Planet using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c22

222 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

Aztec Modifiers
To select Aztec using the Bar Code, Select Type command, the syntax is:
c23[,m1][,m2][,m3][,m4]
The next table lists valid values for m1 through m4.
Values for m1, m2, m3, m4
Parameter Default Values
m1 0 0: 23%+3 codewords. Dynamic
symbol size with fixed error
correction.
1 - 99: Static error correction level in
percent. Dynamic symbol size.
101- 104: Compact Format symbol, 1-4
layers (+100). Error correction
level depends on spare bits in
chosen symbol size. Static symbol
size.
201 - 232: Full range symbol. 1 - 32 layers
(+200). Error correction level
depends on spare bits in chosen
symbol size. Static symbol size.
300: Simple Aztec “rune.”
m2 0 0: Menu symbol off.
1: Menu symbol on.
m3 1 1: Symbol append off. ID field used if
present.
2 - 26: Append # symbols. ID field used if
present.
m4 0 0: ECI off.
1: ECI on.

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 223

Appendix F — Symbology Modifiers

224 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 I Index

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 225

Index

Numerics Code 93 modifiers, 204

12 volt supply value, transmit command, 76, 157, DataMatrix modifiers, 215
158, 159, 160 EAN.UCC Composite modifiers, 220
8636/46 character table, 166 HIBC Code 128 modifiers, 214
86XX Emulation mode HIBC Code 39 modifiers, 208
character table, 166 Interleaved 2 of 5 modifiers, 205
summary of commands supported, 54 JIS-ITF modifiers, 213
using, 54 MaxiCode modifiers, 212
A
MicroPDF417 modifiers, 217
PDF417 modifiers, 210
abort print job command, 76, 82
Planet modifiers, 222
advanced character table, 166
POSTNET modifiers, 209
Advanced mode
QR Code modifiers, 216
on power up command, 108
RSS modifiers, 218
select command, 76, 86
symbology modifiers, described, 204
alphanumeric field separator command, 76, 86
UPC/EAN modifiers, 207
ambient temperature, transmit command, 76, 158
batch
amount of storage, define command, 76, 104
count, set command, 76, 87
application, using to download IPL commands, 7
printing, optimizing with image bands, 53
ASCII
bitmap
control characters. See control characters
cell height for graphic or UDF, define
table of character equivalents, 162
command, 76, 127
table of control characters, 164
cell width for graphic or UDF, define
text file, creating from IPL commands, 6
command, 76, 128
Asian fonts, 16
fonts
installing code page tables, 16
creating with IPL, 181, 182
RAM requirements, 14
downloading
audible alarm, enable or disable command, 76,
using IPL commands, 17
105 using PrintSet, 13
auto-transmit generating from TrueType, 14, 15
1, 2, 3, disable command, 76, 106 resident in printer, 26
1, enable command, 76, 105 user-defined font
2, enable command, 76, 105 clear or define command, 76, 129
3, enable command, 76, 105 editing commands, list of, 69
commands, downloading order, 191 border around human-readable text, define
Aztec modifiers for bar code, select type command, 76, 129
command, 223 box field
B create or edit command, 76, 130
bar code defining, example, 26
field editing commands, list of, 69
create or edit command, 76, 127 C
defining, 25 change origin command, 198
editing commands, list of, 68 character
scaling, 34 bitmap origin offset, define command, 76, 131
select type command, 76, 126 fields
Aztec modifiers, 223 defining, 25
Codabar modifiers, 205 magnifying, 33
Code 11 modifiers, 205 fonts, defining, 25
Code 128 modifiers, 206 rotation or bar code ratio, define command, 76,
Code 16K modifiers, 209 131
Code 2 of 5 modifiers, 205 sets
Code 39 modifiers, 204 extended, 169
Code 49 modifiers, 209 international, 166

226 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Index

character (continued) configuration commands

table amount of storage, define, 104
8636/46, 166 audible alarm, enable or disable, 105
advanced, 166 auto-transmit
Code Page 850, 168 1, 2, 3, disable, 106
IBM translation, 167 1, enable, 105
clear all data command, 76, 87 2, enable, 105
clear data from current field command, 77, 87 3, enable, 105
Codabar modifiers for bar code, select type communication port configuration, set, 106
command, 205 control panel access permission, set, 107
Code 11 modifiers for bar code, select type cutter, enable or disable, 107
command, 205 dark adjust, set, 108
Code 128 modifiers for bar code, select type Direct Graphics Emulation mode, enable or
command, 206 disable, 108
Code 16K modifiers for bar code, select type Emulation or Advanced mode on power
command, 209 up, 108
Code 2 of 5 modifiers for bar code, select type end-of-print skip distance, set, 109
command, 205 format, create or edit, 139
Code 39 IBM language translation, enable or
modifiers for Bar Code, Select Type disable, 110
command, 204 intercharacter delay, set, 111
prefix character, define command, 77, 133 interlabel ribbon save, enable or disable, 111
table of ASCII characters, 162 label
Code 49 modifiers for bar code, select type rest point, adjust, 111
command, 209 retract distance, set, 112
Code 93 modifiers for bar code, select type retract, enable or disable, 111
command, 204 stock type, select, 112
Code Page 850 character table, 168 width, set, 112
code page tables list of, 72
installing, 16 maximum label length, set, 113
list of, 166 media
codes, error, 44 fault recovery mode, set, 113
command tables, load command, 77, 133 sensitivity number, select, 114
command terminator 1 command, 77, 88 message delay, set, 115
command terminator 2 command, 77, 88 number of image bands, set, 115
command terminator command, 77, 158 online or offline on power up, 116
commands pin 11/20 protocol, set, 116
identifying those supported by your printer, 76 postamble, set, 117
immediate, list of, 68 preamble, set, 117
listed by name, 60 print speed, set, 117
listed by syntax, 64 printer language, select, 118
listed by task, 68 printhead
print mode, list of, 72 loading mode, select, 120
program mode, list of, 68 pressure, set, 121
See also immediate commands test parameters, set, 121
See also Print mode, commands RFID parameters, set, 121
See also Program mode, commands RFID tag void text, set, 122
See also Test and Service mode, commands ribbon save zones, set, 123
summary of types, 2 self-strip, enable or disable, 123
test and service, list of, 74 slash zero, enable or disable, 124
communication port configuration, set takeup motor torque, increase, 124
command, 77, 106 top of form, set, 125
communication protocol characters, 193

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 227

Index

configuration parameters, transmit command, 77, end of line, 198

88 raw bitmap data follows, 198
connecting the printer to a PC, 5 repeat last line, 199
control characters transition black, 199
creating ASCII with control codes, 4 transition white, 199
table of full ASCII, 164 using in an example, 200
using in IPL commands, 4 Emulation mode, enable or disable, 77
using printable, 5 IPL commands, list of, 197
control panel access permission, set command, 77, mode
107 definition, 196
creating enter command, 197
ASCII text file of IPL commands, 6 select command, 77, 90
bitmap fonts from TrueType, 15 requirements, 196
formats, 20 sending to the printer, 197
IPL commands, general principles, 4 Direct Graphics Emulation mode, enable or disable
one bit per byte user-defined graphics, 176 command, 108
six bits per byte user-defined graphics, 179 downloading
user-defined bitmap graphics, 176 auto-transmit commands, interface table, 191
user-defined fonts, 181 escape print commands, interface table, 189
current edit session, save command, 77, 134 fonts
cut command, 77, 88 one bit per byte, 181
cutter, enable or disable command, 77, 107 six bits per byte, 182
D
using IPL commands, 17
using third-party software, 18
dark adjust command, in Test and Service
with PrintSet, 13
mode, 77, 158
graphics
dark adjust, set command, 77, 108
one bit per byte, 177
Data Matrix modifiers for bar code, select type
six bits per byte, 179
command, 215
IPL commands, 5
data shift international characters command, 77,
general principles, 4
88
using an application, 7
data source for format in a page, define
using HyperTerminal from Windows, 6
command, 77, 134
print mode commands, interface table, 188
data types, in RLE files, 197
protocol commands, interface table, 192
defining
shift print commands, interface table, 190
bar code fields, 25
status responses, interface table, 191
box or line fields, 26
graphic fields, 27 E
human-readable fields, 25 EAN.UCC Composite modifiers for bar code,
label design fields, 25 select type command, 220
deleting editing
fields, 30 fields, 29
human-readable field, 28 labels, 28
description of IPL commands, 2 Emulation mode
designing character table, 166
formats, 20 enter command, 77, 90
pages, 34 or Advanced mode on power up command, 77,
determining print position of a field, 31 108
direct graphics summary of commands supported, 54
commands using, 54
change origin, 198 end of bitmap command, 198
direct graphics mode, enter, 197 end of line command, 198
end of bitmap, 198 end-of-print skip distance, set command, 77, 109

228 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Index

entering scaling, 33
Print mode, 7 select command, 77, 91
Program mode, 7 width, change magnification, 33
EPC-HEX64 tag format, 152 first data entry field, select command, 78, 92
EPC-HEX96 tag format, 152 flash memory. See memory
EPC-URN tag format, 152 font
error character width, define command, 78, 137
codes choosing type to use, 12
list of, 44 downloading, 181, 182
table, 44 using IPL commands, 17
troubleshooting, 44 using PrintSet, 13
conditions, handling, 42 using third-party software, 18
image overrun, 43 generating bitmap from TrueType, 14, 15
insufficient storage RAM, 43 installing international character sets, 13
invalid numeric character, 43 licensing requirements, 15
parameter, 43 magnifying, 33
syntax, 42 one bit per byte, creating, 181
error code request command, 77, 82 RAM requirements, 14
escape print commands, 189 resident in printer, 26
example selection table, 12
label format six bits per byte
complex, 35 creating, 182
RFID, 38 example, 184
using direct graphics commands, 200 supported by GLOBE, 13
extended character sets, 169 transmit command, 78, 95
F
TrueType support, 14
type, select command, 78, 137
factory defaults, reset command, 77, 158
user-defined, creating, 181
field
using, 119
bar code, 25
font, transmit command, 93
box or line, defining, 26
form feed command, 78, 94
character, defining, 25
format
data, define source command, 77, 134
create or edit command, 78, 139
decrement, set command, 77, 92
creating with IPL, 22
delete command, 77, 134
designing a basic, 20
deleting, 30
direction in a page, define command, 78, 140
direction, define command, 77, 136
editing, 28
editing, 28, 29
editing commands, list of, 69
first data entry, select command, 92
erase command, 78, 140
graphic, defining, 27
offset within a page, define command, 78, 141
height, change magnification, 33
position from page, delete command, 78, 141
human-readable
position in a page, assign command, 78, 141
defaults, 28
print command, 78, 158
defining, 25
programming with IPL, 22
increment, set command, 77, 92
RFID tag, 151
label design, 25
select command, 78, 94
magnifying, 33
storing, 20
origin, define command, 77, 136
transmit command, 78, 95
origin, locating, 31
using, 20
positioning, 31
full ASCII
reimage only modified fields, 53
control characters table, 164
See also format, select command
table of characters, 162
rotating, 32

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 229

Index

G overrun errors, 43
GIAI-64 tag format, 153 immediate commands, 2
GIAI-96 tag format, 153 abort print job, 82
GID-96 tag format, 154 error code, request, 82
GLOBE label and gap length, transmit, 82
supported fonts, 13 list of, 68
using to install international character sets, 13 remaining quantity and batch count,
GRAI-64 tag format, 153 transmit, 82
GRAI-96 tag format, 153 reset, 83
graphic or UDC, define command, 78, 142 status dump, 83
graphic select command, 78, 142 status enquiry, 84
graphics increasing throughput, 49
converting to one bit per byte, 177 increment and decrement, disable command, 78,
creating 96
one bit per byte, 176 installing
six bits per byte, 179 code page tables, 16
user-defined bitmap, 176 international character sets, 13
downloading insufficient storage RAM errors, 43
one bit per byte, 177 intercharacter
six bits per byte, 179 delay, set command, 78, 111
field, defining, 27 space for UDF, define command, 78, 145
one bit per byte, example, 176 interlabel ribbon save, enable or disable
six bits per byte, example, 180 command, 78, 111
H
Interleaved 2 of 5 modifiers for bar code, select type
command, 205
hardware configuration label, print command, 78,
Intermec
158
telephone support, xiv
height magnification of bar, box, or UDC, define
warranty information, xiii
command, 78, 143
web support, xiii
HIBC Code 128 modifiers for bar code, select type
Intermec Printer Language. See IPL
command, 214
international character sets
HIBC Code 39 modifiers for bar code, select type
hex codes, list of, 166
command, 208
installing fonts, 13
human-readable field, 28
interpreting error codes, 44
create or edit command, 78, 144
interpretive field
defining, 25
edit command, 78, 145
deleting, 28
editing commands, list of, 70
editing commands, list of, 69
enable or disable command, 78, 145
HyperTerminal, using to download IPL
invalid numeric character errors, 43
commands, 6
IPL
I commands
IBM downloading, 5
language translation, enable or disable listed by name, 60
command, 78, 110 listed by syntax, 64
translation character table, 167 listed by task, 68
image structure, 4
bands summary of types, 2
description, 49 using control characters, 4
example, 50 using to download fonts, 17
function, 49 using to program printers, 3
optimizing with print speed, 50 what's new, 3
using for batch printing, 53

230 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Index

J image band, description, 49

JIS-ITF modifiers for bar code, select type increasing amount available, 48
command, 213 usage
L
described, 48
limitations, 48
label
problems, 48
and gap length, transmit command, 78, 82
transmit command, 79, 96
design fields, 25
using efficiently, 48
format
message delay, set command, 79, 115
command description, 36, 39
MicroPDF417 modifiers for bar code, select type
designing, 20
command, 217
editing, 28
Multi-Drop protocol, characters available, 193
example, 35, 38
storing, 20 N
using, 20 next data entry field, select command, 79, 97
pages, designing, 34 number of image bands, set command, 79, 115
path open sensor value, transmit command, 78, numeric character errors, invalid, 43
158 numeric field separator command, 79, 97
rest point, adjust command, 79, 111 O
retract
one bit per byte
distance, set command, 79, 112
font
enable or disable command, 79, 111
creating, 181
stock type, select command, 79, 112
example, 181
taken sensor value, transmit command, 79, 159
graphics
width, set command, 79, 112
creating, 176
languages
example, 176
international character sets, 166
online or offline on power up command, 79, 116
selecting on printer, 16
optimizing
length of line or box field, define command, 79,
image bands, for batch printing, 53
146
print speed, using image band setting, 50
licensing fonts, 15
options selected, transmit command, 79, 98
line field
origin of field, 31
create or edit command, 79, 146
outline fonts
defining, 26
clear or create command, 79, 146
editing commands, list of, 70
download command, 79, 147
M downloading
magnifying using IPL commands, 17
bar code fields, 34 using PrintSet, 13
character fields and fonts, 33 example, nibblized file, 18
manual resident in printer, 26
audience, xiv TrueType support, 14
related documents, xiv P
roadmap, 9
page
safety information, xiii
create or edit command, 79, 148
telephone support, xiv
delete command, 79, 149
warranty information, xiii
designing, 34
MaxiCode modifiers for bar code, select type
editing commands, list of, 70
command, 212
print command, 79, 159
maximum label length, set command, 79, 113
select command, 79, 99
media
transmit command, 79, 99
fault recovery mode, set command, 79, 113
parameter, errors, 43
sensitivity number, select command, 79, 114
PC, connecting to a printer, 5
memory

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 231

Index

PDF417 modifiers for bar code, select type page, transmit, 99

command, 210 print, 99
pin 11/20 protocol, set command, 79, 116 print commands, list of, 73
pitch printhead parameters, transmit, 100
label, print command, 79, 159 Program mode, enter, 100
size, set command, 79, 149 program number, transmit, 100
Planet modifiers for bar code, select type protocol modification commands, list of, 74
command, 222 quantity count, set, 100
point size, set command, 79, 149 RFID tag, read, 101
Polling Mode D protocol, characters start and stop codes (Code 39), print, 102
available, 193 storage area usage, transmit, 102
positioning fields, 31 Test and Service mode, enter, 102
postamble, set command, 79, 117 user-defined character, transmit, 102
POSTNET modifiers for bar code, select type user-defined tables, transmit, 103
command, 209 warm boot, 103
preamble, set command, 79, 117 entering, 7
print print speed
commands, list of, 73 adjusting for use with image bands, 50
IPL command, 79, 99 increasing, 49
line dot count limit, set command, 79, 150 printable control characters, using, 5
quality label, print command, 79, 159 printer
speed, set command, 80, 117 batch printing, optimizing, 53
Print mode, 2 connecting to a PC, 5
commands error conditions, 42
Advanced mode, select, 86 increasing throughput, 49
alphanumeric field separator, 86 language, select command, 80, 118
batch count, set, 87 memory, using efficiently, 48
clear all data, 87 programming, 3
clear data from current field, 87 RAM requirements, for fonts, 14
command terminator 1, 88 RAM, understanding, 48
command terminator 2, 88 selecting language, 16
configuration commands, list of, 72 storage memory, described, 48
configuration parameters, transmit, 88 supported fonts, 12
cut, 88 troubleshooting checklist, 42
data shift - international characters, 88 printhead
Direct Graphics mode, select, 90 loading mode, select command, 80, 120
download order, 188 parameters, transmit command, 80, 100
Emulation mode, enter, 90 pressure, set command, 80, 121
field decrement, set, 92 resistance test, begin command, 80, 159
field first data entry, select, 92 resistance values, transmit command, 80, 159
field increment, set, 92 temperature sensor value, transmit
field, select, 91 command, 80, 159
font, transmit, 93 test parameters, set command, 80, 121
form feed, 94 volt supply value, transmit command, 80, 160
format, select, 94 PrintSet, using to download fonts, 13
format, transmit, 95 Program mode, 2
increment and decrement, disable, 96 commands
list of, 72 bar code field, create or edit, 127
memory usage, transmit, 96 bar code, select type, 126
next data entry field, select, 97 Aztec modifiers, 223
numeric field separator, 97 Codabar modifiers, 205
options selected, transmit, 98 Code 11 modifiers, 205
page, select, 99 Code 128 modifiers, 206
Code 16K modifiers, 209

232 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Index

Program mode, commands (continued) or UDC, define, 142

Code 2 of 5 modifiers, 205 type, select, 142
Code 39 modifiers, 204 height magnification of bar, box, or UDC,
Code 49 modifiers, 209 define, 143
Code 93 modifiers, 204 human-readable field, create or edit, 144
DataMatrix modifiers, 215 human-readable field, editing commands, 69
EAN.UCC Composite modifiers, 220 intercharacter space for UDF, define, 145
HIBC Code 128 modifiers, 214 interpretive field
HIBC Code 39 modifiers, 208
Interleaved 2 of 5 modifiers, 205 edit, 145
editing commands, list of, 70
JIS-ITF modifiers, 213 enable or disable, 145
MaxiCode modifiers, 212
MicroPDF417 modifiers, 217 length of line or box field, define, 146
PDF417 modifiers, 210 line field, create or edit, 146
Planet modifiers, 222 line field, editing commands, 70
POSTNET, 209 outline font, clear or create, 146
QR Code modifiers, 216 outline font, download, 147
RSS modifiers, 218 page, create or edit, 148
UPC/EAN modifiers, 207 page, delete, 149
bitmap page, editing commands, 70
cell height for graphic or UDF, pitch size, set, 149
define, 127 point size, set, 149
cell width for graphic or UDF, print line dot count limit, set, 150
define, 128 Program mode, exit, 150
user-defined font, clear or define, 129
user-defined font, editing commands, 69 programming commands, list of, 70
border around human-readable text, RFID tag editing commands, list of, 71
define, 129 RFID tag field setup, 150
box field, create or edit, 130 RFID tag protect field, 155
box field, editing commands, 69 RFID tag write field, 155
character UDC editing commands, list of, 71
bitmap origin offset, define, 131 UDC field editing commands, list of, 71
rotation or bar code ratio, define, 131 user-defined character field, create or
Code 39 prefix character, define, 133 edit, 155
command tables, load, 133 user-defined character, clear or create, 155
current edit session, save, 134 user-defined font character, create, 156
data source for format in a page, define, 134 width of line, box, bar, or character,
enter, 80, 100 define, 156
exit, 80, 150 commands, bar code field editing
field commands, 68
data, define source, 134 commands, list of, 68
delete, 134 entering, 7
direction, define, 136 program number, transmit command, 80, 100
origin, define, 136 programming
font commands, list of, 70
character width, define, 137 printers, described, 3
type, select, 137 protocol commands, downloading, 192
format
protocol modification commands, list of, 74
direction in a page, define, 140 protocols, characters available, 193
editing commands, list of, 69
erase, 140 Q
offset within a page, define, 141 QR Code modifiers for bar code, select type
position from page, delete, 141 command, 216
position in a page, assign, 141 quantity count, set command, 80, 100
graphic

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 233

Index

R definition, 196
RAM rotating fields, 32
error, insufficient storage, 43 RSS modifiers for bar code, select type
increasing amount available, 48 command, 218
requirements for fonts, 14 run-length encoded (RLE) data. See RLE
using efficiently, 48 S
raw bitmap data follows command, 198
safety information, xiii
readable characters, determining from control
scaling fields, 33
character, 5
selecting the printer language, 16
reflective sensor value, transmit command, 80,
self-strip, enable or disable command, 80, 123
160
sending IPL commands to the printer, 5
reimaging modified fields, 53
using an application, 7
remaining quantity and batch count, transmit
using HyperTerminal from Windows, 6
command, 80, 82
serial port configuration, set. See Communication
repeat last line command, 199
Port Configuration, Set
reset command, 80, 83
SGLN-64 tag format, 153
RFID
SGLN-96 tag format, 153
parameters, set command, 80, 121
SGTIN-64 tag format, 152
storing data on tags, 8
SGTIN-96 tag format, 152
ASCII format, 9
shift print commands, 190
Hex format, 9
six bits per byte
numerical format, 9
font
working with tags, 8
creating, 182
writing data to tags, 8
example, 184
RFID tag
graphics
editing commands, list of, 71
creating, 179
field create or edit command, 80
example, 180
field setup command, 80, 150
sizing fields, 33
format
slash zero, enable or disable command, 80, 124
EPC-HEX64, 152
software configuration label, print command, 80,
EPC-HEX96, 152
160
EPC-URN, 152
Speedo fonts, 12
GIAI-64, 153
SSCC-64 tag format, 152
GIAI-96, 153
SSCC-96 tag format, 152
GID-96, 154
standard protocol, characters available, 193
GRAI-64, 153
start and stop codes (Code 39), print
GRAI-96, 153
command, 80, 102
SGLN-64, 153
static RAM. See RAM
SGLN-96, 153
status
SGTIN-64, 152
dump command, 80, 83
SGTIN-96, 152
enquiry command, 80, 84
SSCC-64, 152
responses, downloading order, 191
SSCC-96, 152
storage area usage, transmit command, 102
USDOD-64, 154
storage memory. See memory
USDOD-96, 154
storing label formats, 20
protect command, 155
structure of IPL commands, described, 4
read command, 80, 101
switching between Print mode and Program
void text, set command, 80, 122
mode, 7
write field command, 155
symbology modifiers for bar code, select type
ribbon, save zones, set command, 80, 123
command
RLE
Aztec, 223
data, 196
Codabar, 205
data types, 197
Code 11, 205

234 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

 Index

symbology modifiers for bar code, select type dark adjust, 158
command (continued) enter, 81, 102
Code 128, 206 exit, 81, 160
Code 16K, 209 factory defaults, reset, 158
Code 2 of 5, 205 formats, print, 158
Code 39, 204 hardware configuration label, print, 158
Code 49, 209 label path open sensor value, transmit, 158
Code 93, 204 label taken sensor value, transmit, 159
Data Matrix, 215 list of, 74
described, 204 pages, print, 159
EAN.UCC Composite, 220 pitch label, print, 159
HIBC Code 128, 214 print quality label, print, 159
HIBC Code 39, 208 printhead
Interleaved 2 of 5, 205 resistance test, begin, 159
JIS-ITF, 213 resistance values, transmit, 159
MaxiCode, 212 temperature sensor value, transmit, 159
MicroPDF417, 217 volt supply value, transmit, 160
PDF417, 210 software configuration label, print, 160
Planet, 222 transmissive sensor value, transmit, 160
POSTNET, 209 user-defined characters and graphics, print, 160
QR Code, 216 user-defined fonts, print, 160
RSS, 218 Test and Service mode commands, described, 2
UPC/EAN, 207 third-party software, using to download fonts, 18
syntax errors, 42 throughput, increasing, 49
system commands, list of, 68 top of form, set command, 81, 125
T
transition black command, 199
transition white command, 199
tag
transmissive sensor value, transmit command, 81,
formats, RFID, 151
160
EPC-HEX64, 152
troubleshooting
EPC-HEX96, 152
checklist, 42
EPC-URN, 152
printer, 42
GIAI-64, 153
tutorial, label format, 20
GIAI-96, 153
GID-96, 154 U
GRAI-64, 153 UDC editing commands, list of, 71
GRAI-96, 153 UDC field editing commands, list of, 71
SGLN-64, 153 UPC/EAN modifiers for bar code, select type
SGLN-96, 153 command, 207
SGTIN-64, 152 USDOD-64 tag format, 154
SGTIN-96, 152 USDOD-96 tag format, 154
SSCC-64, 152 user-defined
SSCC-96, 152 bitmap graphics, creating, 176
USDOD-64, 154 character
USDOD-96, 154 and graphics, print command, 81, 160
RFID, field setup, 150 clear or create command, 81, 155
takeup motor torque, increase command, 81, 124 field, create or edit command, 81, 155
telephone support, Intermec, xiv transmit command, 81, 102
Test and Service mode commands fonts
12 volt supply value, transmit, 157, 158, 159, character, clear or create command, 81, 156
160 creating, 181
ambient temperature, transmit, 158 print command, 81, 160
command terminator, 158 tables, transmit command, 81, 103

IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual 235

Index

using W
control characters, in IPL commands, 4 warm boot command, 81, 103
Emulation mode, 54 warranty information, Intermec, xiii
IPL commands to download fonts, 17 web support, Intermec, xiii
PrintSet to download fonts, 13 width of line, box, bar, or character, define
third-party software, to download fonts, 18 command, 81, 156
UTF-8, 119 X
XON/XOFF protocol, characters available, 193

236 IPL Programmer’s Reference Manual

Worldwide Headquarters
6001 36th Avenue West
Everett, Washington 98203
U.S.A.
tel 425.348.2600
fax 425.355.9551
www.intermec.com
© 2006 Intermec Technologies
Corporation. All rights reserved.

IPL Programmer's Reference Manual

*066396-013*
P/N 066396-013